Você está na página 1de 384

XKP<

OQFGN<
QYPGT
XCTKCPV< PCOG"("
CFFTGUU
EQNQWT<

GPIKPG"PQ0< EQPVCEV"PQ0

MG["PQ0< G/ockn"KF<

KPXQKEG"FCVG<
UGNNKPI
QFQOGVGT"TGCFKPI MO FGCNGT"PCOG"
("EQFG
TGIKUVTCVKQP"PQ0<

DCVVGT["OCMG<
FGCNGT
DCVVGT["PQ0< UJQYTQQO
CFFTGUU"("
DCVVGT["DCVEJ EQPVCEV"PQ0"
*UVCOR+
V[TG """""""OCMG""""""""""""""DCVEJ"EQFG

Front Right

Front Left EQPVCEV"PQ0"


HQT"UGTXKEG"
Rear Right CRRQKPVOGPV
("UWRRQTV
Rear Left

Spare

For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact General Manager/Works Manager at any of our Dealer or Authorised Service
Station. For additional enquiry you may contact our Regional Office or Service Department. The addresses and phone numbers are given in
Service Network section of this Manual / Service Network booklet.
OCKPVGPCPEG"UGTXKEG"TGEQTFU
DATE OF KIND OF MILEAGE DESCRIPTION OF JOB NAME OF SERVICING DEALER / JOB CARD NO. MECHANICS
SERVICE SERVICE (KM) MASS SIGNATURE

F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB
(CUSTOMERS COPY) (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST (DEALERS COPY) (1,000 KM or 1 MONTH)
JOB MARK: : Checked OK, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary Please see overleaf for special instructions

Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) (1) Struts / Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage)
(2) Engine Oil (Level, Leakage) (2) Rear spring (Damage) Chassis No. :
(3) Cooling System Hoses & Connections
(Leakage, Damage) Engine No. :
(1) Steering wheel (Play)
(2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear) Mileage
(1) Fuel Filter (Leakage) (Petrol) (3) Tilt Steering (Operation)
(2) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel) Date of Invoice

(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage Date of Inspection


(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol)
(2) Lighting System / Horn (Operation)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage) (Diesel) (3) Wiper (Operation) Registration No.
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage) Service Dealer Code / Mass Code
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation) (1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks / Central
(6) Drive Shaft Noise Customer Name
Locking (Operation)
HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) (1) Drive belt (Tension)
(2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap Address (Please write complete address)
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance)
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage) (3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(4) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage) (4) A/C Filter Element (Inspect) (If equipped)
(5) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper
Piston (Leakage, Damage)
(1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear
Shifting & Speedometer
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Damage) (2) Body & Chassis noise
(2) Wheels (Damage)
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearings (Loose, Damage)

Mechanics Signature
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
Service Managers Signature

* Model Code: DZIRE (Petrol) : A2N412PN Customers Signature


DZIRE (Diesel) : A2N413DN
Model Code*

Chassis No. :

Engine No. :

Mileage

Date of Invoice

Date of Inspection

Registration No.

Service Dealer Code / Mass Code

Customer Name

Address (Please write complete address)


For Servicing Dealer / Mass

Mechanics Signature

Service Managers Signature

Customers Signature
(CUSTOMERS COPY) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST (DEALERS COPY) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
JOB MARK: : Checked OK, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
Please see overleaf for special instructions
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) (1) Struts/Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage) Chassis No. :
(2) Engine Oil (Level, Leakage) (2) Suspension Arms, Knuckle, Rear Spring
(3) Cooling System Hoses & Connections (Damage, Loose) Engine No. :
(Leakage, Damage) (3) All nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
(4) Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage) Mileage
(5) PCV System (Hoses, Connections, Value)(Petrol) (1) Steering Wheel (Play)
Date of Invoice
(2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
(1) Air Cleaner Filter Element (Clean) (Petrol) (3) Tilt Steering (Operation) Date of Inspection
(2) Fuel Filter, Fuel Tank cap, Fuel Lines and
Connection (Leakage) Registration No.
(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage
(3) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel) (2) Lighting System/Horn (Operation) Service Dealer Code / Mass Code
(3) Wiring Harness Connections (Loose, Damage)
(4) AUX USB / Accessory Socket (Operation)
(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol) (5) Wiper (Operation)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage) (Diesel)
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage) (1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks/Central Locking
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation) (Operation & Lubrication)
(6) Drive shaft Noise & Boots (Damage) (2) All Chassis Nuts & Bolts (Inspect)

HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING


(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) (1) Drive Belt (Tension, Damage)
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance) (2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage) (3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(4) Brake Disc & Pads (Inspect) (4) Compressor Mounting Bolts (Tighten)
(5) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage) (5) Clean Condenser with Low Pressure Water Mechanics Signature
(6) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper (6) A/C Filter Element (Inspect)(If equipped)
Piston (Leakage, Damage)
Service Managers Signature
(1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal Wear, Rotation) Shifting & Speedometer Customers Signature
(2) Wheels (Damage) (2) Body & Chassis noise
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearing (Loose, Damage)

* Model Code: DZIRE (Petrol) : A2N412PN


DZIRE (Diesel) : A2N413DN
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
Model Code*

Chassis No. :

Engine No. :

Mileage

Date of Invoice

Date of Inspection

Registration No.

Service Dealer Code / Mass Code

For Servicing Dealer / Mass

Mechanics Signature

Service Managers Signature

Customers Signature
(CUSTOMERS COPY) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST
(DEALERS COPY) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS)
JOB MARK: : Checked OK, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
Please see overleaf for special instructions
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) (1) Struts/Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage)
Chassis No. :
(2) Cooling System Hoses & Connections (2) Suspension Arms, Knuckle, Rear Spring
(Leakage, Damage) (Damage, Loose) Engine No. :
(3) Engine Oil, Oil Filter & Drain Plug (3) All Nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
Gasket (Replace) Mileage
(4) Engine Mounting & Manifold Fixing (1) Steering Wheel (Play)
(Loose, Damage etc.) (2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear) Date of Invoice
(5) Engine Cylinder Head Bolts (Tighten) (3) Tilt Steering (Operation)
Date of Inspection
(1) Air Cleaner Filter Element (Clean) Registration No.
(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage
(2) Fuel Filter (Leakage) (Petrol)
(2) Lighting System/Horn (Operation)
(3) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel) Service Dealer Code / Mass Code
(3) Wiring Harness Connections (Loose, Damage)
(4) AUX USB / Accessory Socket (Operation)
(5) Wiper (Operation)
(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage) (Diesel) (1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks/Central Locking
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage) (Operation & Lubrication)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage) (2) All Chassis Nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation)
(6) Drive Shaft Noise & Boots (Damage) HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
(1) Drive Belt (Tension, Damage)
(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) (2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance) (3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage) (4) Compressor Mounting Bolts (Tighten)
(4) Brake Disc & Pads (Inspect) (5) Clean Condenser with Low Pressure Water
(5) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage) (6) A/C Filter Element (Inspect)(If equipped) Mechanics Signature
(6) Brake Drums & Shoes (Inspect)
(7) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper (1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear Service Managers Signature
Piston (Leakage, Damage) Shifting & Speedometer
(2) Body & Chassis Noise Customers Signature
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Rotation)
(2) Wheels (Damage)
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearing (Loose, Damage)
* Model Code: DZIRE (Petrol) : A2N412PN
DZIRE (Diesel) : A2N413DN
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
Model Code*

Chassis No. :

Engine No. :

Mileage

Date of Invoice

Date of Inspection

Registration No.

Service Dealer Code / Mass Code

For Servicing Dealer / Mass

Mechanics Signature

Service Managers Signature

Customers Signature
FOREWORD MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believes
in conservation and protection of Earths All information in this manual is based
This manual is an essential part of your natural resources. on the latest product information avail-
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle To that end, we encourage every vehicle able at the time of publication. Due to
when resold or otherwise transferred to a owner to recycle, trade-in or properly dis- improvements or other changes, there
new owner or operator. Please read this pose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil, may be discrepancies between informa-
manual carefully before operating your coolant and other fluids, batteries and tion in this manual and your vehicle.
new MARUTI SUZUKI and review the tyres etc. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
manual from time to time. It contains reserves the right to make production
important information on safety, operation MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED changes at any time, without notice and
and maintenance. You are invited to avail without incurring any obligation to
the three Free Inspection Services as make the same or similar changes to
described in the manual. Three free vehicles previously built or sold.
inspection coupons are attached to this
This vehicle may not comply with stan-
manual. Please show this manual to your dards or regulations of other countries.
dealer while you take your MARUTI Before attempting to register this vehi-
SUZUKI for any Service. cle in any other country, check all appli-
To prolong the life of your vehicle and cable regulations and make any neces-
reduce maintenance cost, the periodic sary modifications.
maintenance must be carried out accord-
ing to PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE described in INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE section of this man-
ual. It is essential for preventing trouble
and accidents to ensure your satisfaction
and safety.
Daily inspection and care as per DAILY
INSPECTION CHECKLIST described in
the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
section of this manual is essential for pro-
longing the life of the vehicle and for safe
driving.

68PH0-74E
IMPORTANT MODIFICATION WARN-
NOTE
WARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/
ING
Please read this manual and follow its
instructions carefully. To emphasize spe- WARNING
cial information, the symbol and the words
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and Do not modify your vehicle. Modifica-
NOTE have special meanings. Pay particu- tion could adversely affect safety,
lar attention to messages highlighted by handling, performance, or durability
these signal words: and may violate governmental regula-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
WARNING modification may not be covered
Indicates a potential hazard that 75F135
under warranty.
could result in death or serious
injury. The circle with a slash in this manual
means Dont do this or Dont let this hap- NOTICE
pen.
Improper installation of mobile com-
CAUTION munication equipment such as cellu-
Indicates a potential hazard that lar telephones, CB (Citizens Band)
could result in minor or moderate radios or any other wireless transmit-
injury. ters may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicles ignition
system, resulting in vehicle perfor-
NOTICE mance problems. Consult your MAR-
Indicates a potential hazard that UTI SUZUKI dealer or qualified
could result in vehicle damage. service technician for advice.

NOTE:
Indicates special information to make NOTICE
maintenance easier or instructions clearer. Severe damage may be caused by
the use of either poor quality fuel
and/or lubricants not recommended
by MARUTI SUZUKI.

68PH0-74E
YCTTCPV["RQNKE[ *6+"Nkokvcvkqp<
This warranty shall not apply to:
Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called Maruti Suzuki), (a) Normal maintenance service required other than the three
warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in India free services, including without limitation, oil and fluid
by Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki dealer changes, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel bal-
will be free, under normal use and service, from any defects in ancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injec-
material and workmanship at the time of manufacture SUBJECT tors, adjustments of ignition timing, clutch and valve
TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS: clearance.
(b) The replacement of normal wear parts including without lim-
*3+"Swcnkhkecvkqp< itation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, fil-
To qualify for this warranty the vehicle must be delivered by a ters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutch
Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer and set-up, and serviced by a disc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts
Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer / service station. (except oil seal and glass run).
(c) Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.
*4+"Vgto< (d) Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents
Vjg"vgto"qh"vjg"ycttcpv{"ujcnn"dg"vygpv{/hqwt"*46+"oqpvju"qt or collision.
62.222" mknqogvgtu" *yjkejgxgt" qeewtu" hktuv+" htqo" vjg" fcvg" qh (e) Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or
kpxqkeg"vq"vjg"hktuv"qypgt0 insufficient care.
(f) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including
*5+"Octwvk"Uw|wmk"Ycttcpv{"Qdnkicvkqp< without limitation, the installation of performance accesso-
If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle within ries.
the term stipulated above, Maruti Suzukis only obligation is to (g) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved by
repair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defec- Maruti Suzuki have been used.
tive, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner for (h) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance with
parts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such a the operating instructions in this Owners Manual and Ser-
defect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the time vice Booklet.
of manufacture. The owner is responsible for any repair or (i) Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,
replacements which are not covered by this warranty. the service inspections prescribed in this Owners Manual
and Service Booklet.
(j) Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,
adjusted or repaired by other than an Maruti Suzuki autho-
rised dealer/service station.
(k) Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other than
what it was designed for.

2/5

:4RJ2/96G
(l) Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollution Booklet and maintain adequate proof that such service
and bird droppings. inspections have been performed.
(m) Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of the Make certain that the Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer/ser-
vehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluid vice station performing the service inspection has certified
seep. the work on the Maintenance Service Record page in the
(n) Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, ageing
etc. Owners Manual and Service Booklet and
(o) Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder. Present the Maruti Suzuki Owners Manual and Service
(p) V-belts, hoses and gas leaks. Booklet to the authorised Maruti Suzuki dealer whenever
(q) Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits. requesting service inspections or warranty service.
If the Owners Manual and Service Booklet should be lost or
*7+ Gzvgpv"qh"Ycttcpv{< destroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzuki
This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzuki dealer from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions con-
for Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent or cerning replacement of the Owners Manual and Service Book-
employee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and no let.
dealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make any
oral warranty on Maruti Suzukis behalf. *:+"Fkuenckogt"qh"Eqpugswgpvkcn"Fcocig<
Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements or Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss of
change the design of any model at any time with no obligation to time, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequen-
make the same changes on units previously sold. tial damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to the
owner because of any defect covered by this warranty.
*8+"Ycttcpv{"Ugtxkeg<
To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be pre- *;+"Ejcpig"qh"Qypgt
sented at the owners expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzuki Even if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warranty
workshop. period is effective for the new owner.

*9+"Qypgtu"Ycttcpv{"Tgurqpukdknkvkgu<
It is responsibility of each owner to:
Make certain that the PDl card was completed at the time of
delivery of the vehicle;
Have performed, at his own expenses, by an Maruti Suzuki
authorised dealer/service station all the service inspections
specified in the Maruti Suzuki Owners Manual and Service

2/6

:4RJ2/96G
GOKUUKQP"YCTTCPV["RQNKE[ 3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of the
parts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and its
dealer and results of the examination will be final and binding.
Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzuki If after examination, the warrantable condition is not estab-
vehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel to lished, Maruti Suzuki and its dealer has the right to charge all,
the regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities *Pgy or part of the cost of such examination.
Fgnjk."Mqnmcvc."Owodck"cpf"Ejgppck+ with effect from July 1st,
2001. 4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)
will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will be
Vgtou< charged as per actual.
The Emission Warranty will be applicable for :2.222" mou" qt" 5 5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associated
{gctu (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of invoice to the parts, are not independently replaceable, on account of these
first owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case of being integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki and
any change in ownership provided the production of all valid docu- its dealer will have the sole discretion to replace either the
ments. entire assembly or by using some of the parts of the system
through suitable repairs or modifications.
Eqpfkvkqpu< 6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which may
1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for
be found necessary to establish compliance of Emission War-
a prima facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet the
ranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same
Emission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115 of
is under product warranty. The consumable will be charged as
Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.
per actual under such repair or replacement.
2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examination 7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transporta-
carried out by Maruti Suzuki or its dealer which leads to firm tion of the vehicle to the nearest Maruti Suzuki dealer work-
conclusions that the shop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle during
a) Original settings have not been tampered in any case. the period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/
b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect. or repair by Maruti Suzuki dealer.
c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given
in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained and 8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that may
used in accordance with the instructions as specified in be charged by statutory authorities on account of failure to
Owners Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel and comply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.
different oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) are 9. Emission Warranty will not be affected on the change of owner,
also as per specification. provided all the documents are available.

2/7

:4RJ2/96G
10.All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owners Manual Cppgzwtg"/"C
and Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in the List of parts covered under Emission Warranty
manual for emission warranty.
1. Fuel Injection Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body
11. The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution Under Assembly
Control) certificate valid for the period preceding the test during 2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).
which the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the mainte- 3. Intake Manifold.
nance of the vehicle as per specification in Owners Manual
and Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of the 4. EGR valve.
vehicle) will also be required. 5. Ignition Coil.
6. Canister Assembly.
Eqpfkvkqpu"wpfgt"yjkej"vjg"Gokuukqp"Ycttcpv{"ku"pqv 7. Vapour Liquid Seperator.
CRRNKECDNG 8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.
1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate. 9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.
2. Vehicle not serviced from Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop 10. Oil Filler Cap.
as per the schedule specified in this Owners Manual and Ser- 11. Catalytic Convertor.
vice Booklet. 12. Exhaust Manifold.
3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, ral- 13. All Fuel Injection System related sensors.
lies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc). 14. High Pressure Fuel Pump.
4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Genuine Part). 15. Glow Plug.
5. Vehicle that has been tampered with. 16. Glow Plug Controller.
6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading
can not be determined.
7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,
Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).

2/8

:4RJ2/96G
TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

SPECIFICATIONS 11

SERVICE NETWORK 12

56RH0-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1

65D394

56RH0-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Fuel Recommendation NOTE: Diesel engine


If you are not satisfied with the driveability The diesel fuel should be with Cetane
Petrol engine or fuel economy of your vehicle when you Number (CN) higher than 51 and sulfur
To avoid damaging catalytic converter you are using a petrol/alcohol blend, you content less than 50 ppm (parts per mil-
must use unleaded petrol with an octane should switch back to unleaded petrol con- lion). MARUTI SUZUKI recommends to
number (RON) of 91 or higher. taining no alcohol. use the diesel fuel conformable to EN590.
Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oils
Petrol/Ethanol blends
Blends of unleaded petrol and ethanol
NOTICE and so forth.
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are The fuel tank has an air space to
commercially available in certain areas. allow for fuel expansion in hot NOTICE
Blends of this type may be used in your weather. If you continue to add fuel The fuel tank has an air space to
vehicle if they are no more than 10% etha- after the filler nozzle has automati- allow for fuel expansion in hot
nol. cally shut off or an initial blowback weather. If you continue to add fuel
Make sure this petrol-ethanol blend has occurs, the air chamber will become after the filler nozzle has automati-
octane ratings no lower than those recom- full. Exposure to heat when fully cally shut off or an initial blowback
mended for the petrol. fuelled in this manner will result in occurs, the air chamber will become
leakage due to fuel expansion. To full. Exposure to heat when fully
Petrol/Methanol blends
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling fuelled in this manner will result in
Blends of unleaded petrol and methanol
after the filler nozzle has automati- leakage due to fuel expansion. To
(wood alcohol) are also commercially
cally shut off, or when using an alter- prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
available in some areas. DO NOT USE
native non-automatic system, initial after the filler nozzle has automati-
fuels containing more than 5% methanol
vent blowback occurs. cally shut off, or when using an alter-
under any circumstances. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems native non-automatic system, initial
vent blowback occurs.
resulting from the use of such fuels are not NOTICE
the responsibility of MARUTI SUZUKI and
may not be covered under the New Vehicle Be careful not to spill fuel containing NOTICE
Warranty. alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol may spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up Be careful not to spill fuel containing
be suitable for use in your vehicle if they immediately. Fuels containing alco- alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors hol can cause paint damage, which is spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
not covered under the New Vehicle immediately. Fuels containing alco-
Limited Warranty. hol can cause paint damage, which is
not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

1-1

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

BEFORE DRIVING
Supplemental restraint system (air bags) ......................... 2-38
Instrument cluster (Type A) (if equipped) ......................... 2-45 2
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-46
Fuel gauge ........................................................................... 2-46
Brightness control .............................................................. 2-46
Information display ............................................................. 2-47
Instrument cluster (Type B) (if equipped) ......................... 2-53
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-54
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-54
Fuel gauge ........................................................................... 2-54
Brightness control .............................................................. 2-55
Information display ............................................................. 2-55
Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 2-64
Lighting control lever ......................................................... 2-71
Headlight leveling switch ................................................... 2-77
Turn signal control lever .................................................... 2-78
60G404
Hazard warning switch ....................................................... 2-79
Windshield wiper and washer lever .................................. 2-79
Keys ......................................................................................2-1
Tilt steering lock lever ........................................................ 2-80
Door locks ............................................................................2-2
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-81
Keyless push start system remote controller /
Heated rear window switch (if equipped) ......................... 2-81
Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped) ................2-5
Security system (if equipped) .............................................2-13
Theft deterrent light (if equipped) ......................................2-15
Windows ...............................................................................2-15
Mirrors ..................................................................................2-18
Front seats ...........................................................................2-20
Rear seats .............................................................................2-22
Seat belts and child restraint systems ..............................2-23

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Keys Immobilizer system For vehicles without a keyless push


This system is designed to help prevent start system
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the If this light blinks or comes on, turn the
EXAMPLE engine starting system. ignition switch to LOCK position, and
The engine can be started only with your then turn it back to ON position.
vehicles original immobilizer ignition key If the light still blinks after or comes on the
or keyless push start system remote con- ignition switch is turned back to ON posi-
troller, which has an electronic identifica- tion, there may be something wrong with
tion code programmed in it. The key or your key or with the immobilizer system.
remote controller communicates the identi- Ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
fication code to the vehicle when the igni- to have the system inspected.
tion switch is turned to ON position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the For vehicles with a keyless push start
ignition mode to ON. If you need to make system
spare keys or remote controllers, see your If this light blinks or comes on, change the
54G489
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. ignition mode to LOCK (OFF), and then
The vehicle must be programmed with the change it back to ON. Also refer to If the
Your vehicle comes with a pair of keys. correct identification code for the spare. A PUSH indicator light blinks or comes on
The key(s) may or may not be equipped key made by an ordinary locksmith will not and the engine cannot be started in Start-
with a transmitter depending on model work. ing engine (vehicle with keyless push start
variant. Keep the spare key in a safe system) (if equipped) in OPERATING
place. One key can open all of the locks on YOUR VEHICLE section.
the vehicle If the light still blinks or comes on after the
The key identification number is stamped ignition mode is changed back to ON,
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on there may be something wrong with your
the keys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If key or with the immobilizer system. Ask an
you lose your keys, you will need this num- authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
ber to have new keys made. Write the 80JM122 have the system inspected.
number below for your future reference. If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys- The immobilizer/keyless push start system
tem warning light blinks or comes on when warning light may also blinks or comes on
KEY NUMBER: if the remote controller is not in the vehicle
the ignition switch is in ON position or the
ignition mode is ON, the engine will not when you close the door or attempt to start
start. the engine.

2-1

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Door locks To unlock a front door from the outside of


If you lose your immobilizer ignition key the vehicle, insert the key and turn the top
or remote controller, ask an authorised Side door locks of the key toward the rear of the vehicle.
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as pos-
sible to deactivate the lost one, and to EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
make a new key or remote controller.
If you own other vehicles with immobi- (1) (1)
lizer keys, keep those keys away from
the ignition switch or the engine switch (2)
(2)
when using your MARUTI SUZUKI vehi-
cle. Otherwise, or the engine may not be (3)
started because they may interfere with
your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicles immobi-
lizer system.
If you attach any metal objects to the
immobilizer key or remote controller, it (4)
may not start the engine.
79MH0201 74LHT0201
NOTICE (1) LOCK (1) LOCK
The immobilizer key and remote con- (2) UNLOCK (2) UNLOCK
troller are sensitive electronic instru- (3) Front
ments. To avoid damaging them: (4) Rear To lock a door from the inside of the vehi-
Do not expose them to impacts, cle, turn the lock knob forward. Turn the
moisture or high temperature such To lock a front door from the outside of the lock knob backward to unlock the door.
as on the dashboard under direct vehicle: To lock a rear door from the outside of the
sunlight. Insert a key and turn the top of the key vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and
Keep them away from magnetic toward the front of the vehicle, or close the door. You do not need to pull and
objects. Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and hold the door handle as you close the door.
hold the door handle as you close the
Ignition key reminder (if equipped) door. NOTE:
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind Hold the door handle when you close a
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the locked front door, or the door will not
ignition keyhole when the drivers door is remain locked.
opened.

2-2

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Central door locking system NOTE: NOTE:


(Vehicle with keyless entry system You can switch the function that unlocks all You can also lock or unlock all doors by
and keyless push start system) doors from requiring two turns to requiring operating the transmitter or remote con-
one turn, and vice versa, via the informa- troller. Refer to Keyless push start sys-
EXAMPLE tion display setting mode. For details on tem remote controller / Keyless entry
(1) how to use the information display, refer to system transmitter (if equipped) in this
(2) Information display in this section. section.
If your vehicle is equipped with the key-
To unlock the drivers door only, insert the
less push start system, you can also lock
key in that door lock and turn the top of the
(3) or unlock all doors by pushing the
key toward the rear of the vehicle once.
request switch. Refer to Keyless push
start system remote controller / Keyless
entry system transmitter (if equipped) in
EXAMPLE this section.
(1)
(4) (2)
NOTE:
All doors are automatically unlocked
54G294 when you change the ignition mode to
LOCK (OFF) or turn the ignition switch
(1) LOCK
to LOCK position and pull out the key.
(2) UNLOCK
All doors are automatically locked for
(3) Front
safety when the vehicle speed reaches
(4) Rear
15 km/h.
You can change the automatic locking or
You can lock and unlock all doors simulta-
unlocking function mentioned above via
neously by using the key in the drivers
the setting mode of the information dis-
door lock.
56RH00201 play. For details on how to use the infor-
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the (1) LOCK mation display, refer to Information
key in the drivers door lock and turn the (2) UNLOCK Display in this section.
top of the key toward the front of the vehi-
cle once. You can also lock or unlock all doors by
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert pressing the front or rear of the switch,
the key in the drivers door lock and turn respectively.
the top of the key toward the rear of the
vehicle twice.

2-3

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Child-proof locks (rear door) Trunk lid Refer to Keyless push start system
remote controller in this section.
EXAMPLE The trunk lid unlatch switch (1) operates
only to open the trunk lid. If you close the
trunk lid with the keyless push start system
(2) remote controller left in the trunk with all
the doors locked, the trunk will be automat-
(1) ically unlatched.

EXAMPLE
(1)

EXAMPLE
56RH00202 56RH00203

(1) LOCK (Vehicle with keyless entry system) (2)


(2) UNLOCK To unlock the all doors, push UNLOCK
button twice on the keyless entry system
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a transmitter. Push the trunk lid unlatch
child-proof lock which can be used to help switch (1) and lift the trunk lid to open the
prevent unwanted opening of the door trunk lid.
from inside the vehicle. When the lock 56RH00204
lever is in LOCK position (1), the rear door You can unlock the lid by pulling the trunk
(Vehicle with keyless push start system)
can only be opened from outside. When lid opener lever (2) located on the out-
the lock lever is in UNLOCK position (2), Push the trunk lid unlatch switch (1) and lift
the trunk lid to open the trunk lid. The trunk board side of the drivers side.
the rear door can be opened from inside or
outside. lid unlatch switch (1) operates when the
keyless push start system remote control-
ler is within the switchs operating range.
WARNING If the remote controller is within the operat-
Place the child-proof lock in LOCK ing range, you can also unlatch and let the
position whenever children are trunk lid slightly open by holding TRUNK
seated in the rear. LID UNLOCK button on the remote con-
troller pressed for more than 1 second.

2-4

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Keyless push start system


WARNING WARNING
remote controller / Keyless
Always make sure that the trunk lid is Radio waves from the keyless push
closed and latched securely. Other- entry system transmitter start system antenna(s) may interfere
wise, it may open unexpectedly while (if equipped) with operation of electrical medical
driving. Completely closing it also equipment such as pacemakers. Fail-
helps keep exhaust gases from enter- ure to take the precautions listed
ing the vehicle. Type A Type B below can increase the risk of severe
injury or death due to radio wave
interference.
Anyone who uses electrical medi-
cal equipment such as a pace-
maker should consult the medical
equipment supplier or their medical
advisor about whether radio waves
from the antenna(s) can interfere
with the medical equipment.
If radio wave interference is a con-
EXAMPLE cern, have the function of the
56RM02003 antenna(s) disabled by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-
less push start system remote controller
(Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-
mitter (Type B). The remote controller has
a keyless entry system and a keyless push
start system. The transmitter has only a
keyless entry system. For details, refer to
the following explanations.

2-5

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Keyless push start system remote (1) LOCK button time, the light will start to fade out imme-
controller (Type A) (2) UNLOCK button diately.
The remote controller enables the follow- (3) TRUNK LID UNLOCK button
ing operations: Check that the doors are locked after you
You can lock or unlock all doors simultane- operate LOCK button (1).
You can lock or unlock the doors by ously by operating the remote controller
operating LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on near the vehicle.
the remote controller. Refer to the expla- NOTE:
nation in this section. If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
Central door locking system onds after UNLOCK button (2) is operated,
You can lock or unlock the doors by To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1)
pushing the request switch. For details, the doors will automatically lock again.
once.
refer to the explanation in this section. To unlock only the drivers door, push
You can start the engine without using TRUNK LID UNLOCK button (3) function
UNLOCK button (2) once. Push and hold TRUNK LID UNLOCK but-
an ignition key. For details, refer to To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK
Engine switch (Vehicle with keyless ton pressed for more than 1 second; the
button (2) once again. trunk lid will be unlatched and open
push start system) (if equipped) in
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section. slightly.
NOTE:
You can unlatch and let the trunk lid You can switch the function that unlocks all
slightly open by pushing and holding Car locator function
doors from requiring two pushes to requir- This function helps in locating the vehicle.
TRUNK LID UNLOCK button on the ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor-
remote controller. Refer to the explana- Push both of LOCK button (1) and
mation display setting mode. For details on UNLOCK button (2) for more than 3 sec-
tion in this section. how to use the information display, refer to onds. The turn signal lights will blink for
Information display in this section. about 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will
sound for about 27.5 seconds at the same
The turn signal lights will flash once and time.
the siren will sound once when the doors To cancel the car locator function, press
are locked. any button (LOCK or UNLOCK).
(1) You can also cancel the car locator func-
When the doors are unlocked: tion in any of the following operations.
The turn signal lights will flash twice and Press the engine switch to change the
(2)
the siren will sound twice. ignition mode to ON.
If the interior light switch is in DOOR Bring the remote controller with you and
(3) position, the interior light will turn on for press the request switch.
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If
EXAMPLE you press the engine switch during this
56RM02004

2-6

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: roundings, especially near other trans- When the remote controller is within the
The car locator function will not activate mitting devices such as radio towers or operating range described in this section,
when the ignition mode is ACC or ON or CB (Citizens Band) radios. you can lock or unlock the doors by push-
pre warning / full blast warning by shock The door locks cannot be operated with ing the request switch (1) on the drivers
sensor or alarm is in activated condition. the remote controller if the ignition mode door handle or front passengers door han-
is in any other mode than the LOCK dle.
NOTE: (OFF).
When any door is open, if you push When all doors are unlocked:
If you lock the doors using the remote
LOCK button on the remote controller, To lock all doors, push one of the
controller when the engine hood are
the siren will sound and doors cannot be request switches once.
open, the siren will sound 3 times to
remind you. locked. The turn signal lights will flash once and
If the security system was triggered due If you lose one of the remote controllers, the siren will sound once when the doors
to an unauthorised entry into the vehicle ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki work- are locked.
and then you unlock the doors using the shop as soon as possible for replace-
remote controller, the siren will sound 4 ment. Have an authorised Maruti Suzuki To unlock a door or all doors:
times to remind you. If this happens, workshop program the new remote con- Push one of the request switches once
check whether your vehicle has been troller code in your vehicles memory so to unlock only one door.
broken into while you were away from it. that the old code is erased. Push one of the request switches twice
Once you push both of LOCK button (1) to unlock all doors.
and UNLOCK button (2), then you push Keyless unlocking/locking using the
one of the buttons within 5 seconds, the request switches NOTE:
siren will not sound. However, push one You can switch the function that unlocks all
of the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren doors from requiring two pushes to requir-
will sound. ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor-
You can set whether the siren sounds mation display setting mode. For details on
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via how to use the information display, refer to
the setting mode of the information dis- Information display in this section.
play.
For details on how to use the information When the doors are unlocked:
display, refer to Information Display in The turn signal lights will flash twice and
this section. the siren will sound twice.
If the interior light switch is in DOOR
(1) position, the interior light will turn on for
NOTE:
The maximum operating distance of the about 15 seconds and then fade out. If
EXAMPLE you press the engine switch during this
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.), 56RH00208
but this can vary depending on the sur-

2-7

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

time, the light will start to fade out imme- When the remote controller is within
diately. approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a NOTICE
Check that the doors are locked after you front door handle, you can lock or unlock
operate the request switch to lock the the doors by pushing the request switch. The remote controller is a sensitive
doors. electronic instrument. To avoid dam-
NOTE: aging the remote controller:
NOTE: If the remote controller is outside the Do not expose it to impacts, mois-
The door locks cannot be operated by request switch operating range ture or high temperature such as
the request switch under the following described above, you will not be able to by leaving it on the dashboard
conditions: operate the request switch. under direct sunlight.
If any door is open or is not completely If the battery of the remote controller Keep the remote controller away
closed. runs down or there are strong radio from magnetic objects such as a
If the ignition mode is in any other waves or noise, the request switch oper- television.
mode than LOCK (OFF). ating range may be reduced or the
If no doors are opened within about 30 remote controller may be inoperative. NOTE:
seconds after unlocking the doors by If the remote controller is too close to the The keyless push start system may not
pushing the request switch, the doors door glass, the request switches may not function correctly in certain environments
will be locked again automatically. operate. or under certain operating conditions such
If a spare remote controller is in the vehi- as the following:
EXAMPLE cle, the request switches may not oper- When there are strong signals coming
ate normally. from a television, power station or a cel-
(1) The remote controller will only operate a lular phone.
request switch if it is within the switchs When the remote controller is in contact
operating range. For example, if the with or covered by a metal object.
remote controller is within the operating When a radio wave type remote keyless
range of the drivers door request switch entry is used nearby.
but not the front passengers door When the remote controller is placed
request switch, the drivers door switch near an electronic device such as per-
can be operated but the front passen- sonal computer.
(1) gers door switch cannot be operated.

56RH00209

(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

2-8

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Some additional precautions you should To stow the key into the remote controller, Any door is open.
take and information you should be aware push the key in the remote controller until
Press the request switch again after doing
of are: you hear a click.
the following:
Check that the key is stowed in the
With the ignition mode changed to LOCK
remote controller. If the remote controller EXAMPLE (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring
becomes unusable, you will not be able
out the remote controller if it is inside the
to lock or unlock the doors.
vehicle and check that all doors are com-
Check that the driver always carries the (A) pletely closed.
remote controller.
If you lose one of the remote controllers,
Reminder function
ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
shop as soon as possible for a replace-
ment. Have an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop program the new remote con-
troller code in your vehicles memory so
that the old code is erased.
You can use up to four remote control- 56RH00211
lers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask To remove the key from the remote control-
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop ler, slide the lock knob (A) in arrow direc-
for details. tion and pull the key out from the remote
The battery life of the remote controller controller.
is about two years, but it can vary
depending on usage conditions. Request switch warning buzzer EXAMPLE
The exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-
EXAMPLE onds in the following conditions to warn 56RH00212

you that the request switch is not working: If the remote controller is not in the vehicle
The request switch is pressed after all under the following conditions, the buzzer
doors are closed with the ignition mode sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds
changed to ACC or ON by pressing and the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
the engine switch. tem warning light on the instrument cluster
The request switch is pressed in any of blinks:
the following conditions after changing When one or more doors are opened and
the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF) by all of the doors are later closed with the
pressing the engine switch. ignition in any other mode than LOCK
The remote controller is left inside the (OFF).
56RH00210 vehicle.

2-9

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

The indicator light will turn off within sev- Battery replacement 2) Replace the battery (1) so its - termi-
eral seconds after the remote controller is If the remote controller becomes unusable, nal faces the bottom of the case as
returned to an area of the vehicle other replace the battery. shown in the illustration.
than the trunk. 3) Close the remote controller firmly.
To replace the battery of the remote con-
4) Check that the door locks can be oper-
troller:
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle ated with the remote controller.
and you lock the drivers door or front pas- EXAMPLE 5) Dispose of the used battery properly
sengers door as described below, the door according to applicable rules or regula-
will be automatically unlocked. tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
If you open the drivers door and lock the ies with ordinary household trash.
door by turning the lock knob forward or
pushing the power door locking switch, WARNING
the drivers door will be automatically
unlocked. Swallowing a lithium battery may
If you open the front passengers door cause serious internal injury. Do not
and lock the door by turning the lock allow anyone to swallow a lithium
knob forward or pushing the power door
56RH00213 battery. Keep lithium batteries away
locking switch, the front passengers 1) Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver covered from children and pets. If swallowed,
door will be automatically unlocked. with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote contact a physician immediately.
controller and pry it open.
If you close the trunk lid with the remote NOTICE
controller left in the trunk with all the doors
(1) The remote controller is a sensitive
locked, the trunk will be automatically
unlatched. electronic instrument. To avoid
damaging it, do not expose it to
NOTE: dust or moisture or tamper with
The reminder will not operate when the internal parts.
remote controller is on the instrument When replacing the battery by
panel, in the glove box, in a storage yourself, the remote controller
compartment, in the sun visor or on the could be damaged affected by
floor, etc. EXAMPLE static electricity. Discharge the
Check that the driver always carries the 56RH00214 static electricity built up in your
remote controller. body by touching metal before
(1) Lithium disc type battery: replacing the battery.
Do not leave the remote controller in the CR2032 or equivalent
vehicle when leaving the vehicle.

2-10

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: NOTE: transmitter, the siren will sound 4 times


Used batteries must be disposed of prop- You can switch the function that unlocks all to remind you. If this happens, check
erly according to applicable rules or regu- doors from requiring two pushes to requir- whether your vehicle has been broken
lations and must not be disposed of with ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor- into while you were away from it.
ordinary household trash. mation display setting mode. For details on Once you push both of the LOCK button
how to use the information display, refer to (1) and UNLOCK button (2), then you
Keyless entry system transmitter Information display in this section. push one of the buttons within 5 sec-
(Type B) onds, the siren will not sound. However,
The turn signal lights will flash once and push one of the buttons 5 seconds later,
the siren will sound once when the doors the siren will sound.
are locked. You can set whether the siren sounds
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via
When the doors are unlocked: the setting mode of the information dis-
The turn signal lights will flash twice and play. For details on how to use the infor-
the siren will sound twice. mation display, refer to Information
If the interior light switch is in DOOR Display in this section.
position, the interior light will turn on for
(2) NOTE:
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If
(1) The maximum operating distance of the
EXAMPLE you insert the key into the ignition switch
keyless entry system transmitter is about
during this time, the light will start to fade
56RM02005 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending
out immediately.
(1) LOCK button on the surroundings, especially near
(2) UNLOCK button Check that the doors are locked after you other transmitting devices such as radio
operate LOCK button (1). towers or CB (Citizens Band) radios.
You can lock or unlock all doors simultane- The door locks cannot be operated with
ously by operating the transmitter near the NOTE: the transmitter, if the ignition key is
vehicle. If no door is opened within about 30 sec- inserted in the ignition switch.
onds after UNLOCK button (2) is operated, When any door is open, the door locks
Central door locking system the doors will automatically lock again. can only be unlocked with the transmit-
To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1) ter, and the turn signal light will not flash.
NOTE: If you lose one of the transmitters, ask
once. If you lock the doors using the transmit-
To unlock only the drivers door, push your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
ter when the engine hood is open, the as soon as possible for a replacement.
UNLOCK button (2) once. siren will sound 3 times to remind you.
To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK Have your dealer program the new
If the security system was triggered due transmitter code in your vehicles mem-
button (2) once again. to an unauthorised entry into the vehicle ory so that the old code is erased.
and then you unlock the doors using the

2-11

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Battery replacement
NOTICE If the transmitter becomes unusable, EXAMPLE
replace the battery. (2)
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging To replace the battery of the transmitter:
the transmitter:
Do not expose it to impacts, mois- EXAMPLE
ture or high temperature such as
by leaving it on the dashboard
under direct sunlight. (1)
(3)
Keep the transmitter away from
magnetic objects such as a televi- (2)
sion.

Car locator function 68LM249


This function helps in locating the vehicle.
Push both of the LOCK button (1) and (3) Lithium disc type battery:
UNLOCK button (2) for more than 3 sec- CR1616 or equivalent
onds.
The turn signal lights will blink for about 3) Put the edge of a flat-bladed screw-
68LM248
27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for driver in the slot of the transmitter (2)
about 27.5 seconds at the same time. 1) Remove the screw (1), and open the and pry it open.
To cancel the car locator function, press transmitter cover. 4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal
any button (LOCK or UNLOCK). 2) Remove the transmitter (2). faces + mark of the transmitter.
You can also turn the ignition switch to the 5) Close the transmitter and install it into
ON position to cancel the car locator the transmitter holder.
function. 6) Close the transmitter cover, install and
tighten the screw (1).
NOTE: 7) Check that the door locks can be oper-
The car locator function will not activate ated with the transmitter.
when the key is in the ignition switch or pre 8) Dispose of the used battery properly
warning / full blast warning by shock sen- according to applicable rules or regula-
sor or alarm is inactivated condition. tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
ies with ordinary household trash.

2-12

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Security system (if equipped) NOTE:


WARNING The security system is armed after you
The default setting of the shock sensor
is in the disabled state. Set to the
Swallowing a lithium battery may close and lock all doors (including engine
enabled state and adjust sensitivity of
cause serious internal injury. Do not hood and trunk lid) by using the keyless
each warning according to your prefer-
allow anyone to swallow a lithium entry system transmitter, keyless push
ence. For details on how to use the infor-
battery. Keep lithium batteries away start system remote controller or request
mation display, refer to Information
from children and pets. If swallowed, switch.
Display in this section.
contact a physician immediately. Once the system is armed, any attempt to
Your dealer may have already set the
open a door by using any other means (*)
shock sensor of the vehicle to the
than the keyless entry system transmitter,
NOTICE enabled state before you purchase it.
keyless push start system remote control-
Consult your dealer for further informa-
The transmitter is a sensitive elec- ler, request switch or open the engine
tion.
tronic instrument. To avoid damag- hood, will cause the alarm to be triggered.
ing it, do not expose it to dust or * These means include the following:
NOTE:
moisture or tamper with internal The key
The security system generates alarms
parts. The lock knob on a door
when any of the predetermined condi-
When replacing the battery by The central door locking switch
tions is met. However, the system does
yourself, the transmitter could be The trunk lid unlatch switch
not have any function of blocking unau-
damaged affected by static electric- Also, in case that you have set the shock
thorised entry into the vehicle.
ity. Discharge the static electricity sensor to enabled state and set sensitivity
Always use the keyless entry system
built up in your body by touching of the pre-warning function and full blast
transmitter, keyless push start system
metal before replacing the battery. warning function to a level other than 0, the
remote controller or request switch to
warning will be triggered in case of any
unlock the doors when the security sys-
attempt to tamper with the vehicle. The
NOTE: tem has been armed.Using a key
shock sensor can be selected enabled or
Used batteries must be disposed of prop- instead will trigger the alarm.
disabled state, and sensitivity of each
erly according to applicable rules or regu- If a person who does not know the secu-
warning can be adjusted as desired. To set
lations and must not be disposed of with rity system is going to drive the vehicle,
the shock sensor, ask your authorised
ordinary household trash. we recommend you explain the system
Maruti Suzuki workshop or use the setting
and its operation to the person. Mistak-
mode of the information display.
enly triggering the alarm may cause a
nuisance to others.
Even if the security system is armed,
you should still be careful to guard
against theft. Do not leave money or
things of value in the vehicle.

2-13

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

How to arm the security system outside, using the door lock knobs or the Unlock the doors using the keyless entry
Lock all doors (including engine hood and central door locking switch from inside. system transmitter, keyless push start
trunk lid) using the keyless entry system If any door is not operated within approx- system remote controller or request
transmitter, keyless push start system imately 30 seconds after the doors have switch.
remote controller or request switch. been unlocked using the keyless entry
When the system is armed, the indicator system transmitter, keyless push start NOTE:
continues to blink at intervals of approxi- system remote controller or request Even after the alarm has stopped, if you
mately 2 seconds. switch, the doors are automatically lock the doors using the keyless entry
locked again. When the doors are system transmitter, keyless push start
EXAMPLE locked, the security system will be system remote controller or request
armed. switch, the security system will be
If the security system indicator (1) blinks rearmed.
when the ignition switch is in the ON If you disconnect the battery while the
position or the ignition mode is ON, security system is in the armed condition
there may be something wrong with the or the alarm is actually in operation, the
security system. Ask your authorised alarm will be re-triggered when the bat-
Maruti Suzuki workshop to inspect the tery is then reconnected.
system. Even after the alarm has stopped at the
end of the predetermined operation time,
How to disarm the security system it will be triggered again if any of the
Simply unlock the doors using the keyless doors, trunk or engine hood is opened,
(1) entry system transmitter, keyless push without disarming the security system.
start system remote controller or request
56RH00215 switch. The security system indicator will Checking whether the alarm has been
NOTE: go out, indicating that the security system triggered during parking
To prevent the alarm from being acci- is disarmed. If the alarm was triggered and you then
dentally triggered, avoid arming it while turn the ignition switch to ON position or
anyone remains inside the vehicle. The How to stop the alarm the ignition mode is ON the security sys-
alarm will be triggered if any person Should the alarm be triggered accidentally, tem indicator will blink rapidly for about 8
inside opens the door, trunk, engine the alarm will stop by the following opera- seconds and a buzzer will beep 4 times
hood, or the warning may be triggered if tions. during this period. If this happens, check
anyone swings the vehicle (if the shock Press the engine switch to change the whether the vehicle has been broken into
sensor is in the enabled state). ignition mode to ON or turn the ignition while you were away from it.
The security system is not armed when switch to ON position in case of emer-
all doors are locked using the key from gency.

2-14

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Security system indication Theft deterrent light Windows


If any of the doors or trunk are opened
without unlocking by the keyless entry (if equipped) Manual window control
system transmitter, keyless push start (if equipped)
system remote controller or request EXAMPLE
switch, all turn signal lights start to blink EXAMPLE
and the interior buzzer beeps intermit-
tently. After 5 seconds, the siren will
sound for about 27.5 seconds. The
security system indicator continues to
blink during this time.
If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig-
nal lights blink, and the siren sounds for
about 27.5 seconds. The security sys-
tem indicator continues to blink during
this time.

(If the shock sensor is in the enabled state) 56RH00220


If the vehicle feels a shock higher than This light will blink with the ignition switch 60G010A
the pre-warning sensitivity, the siren in LOCK or ACC position. The blinking Raise or lower the door windows by turning
sounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn- light is intended to deter theft by leading the handle located on the door panel.
ing). If the vehicle feel a shock higher others to believe that the vehicle is
than the full blast warning sensitivity, the equipped with a security system.
siren sounds for about 5 seconds (full
Electric window controls
blast warning). The security system indi- (if equipped)
cator continues to blink during this time. The electric windows can only be operated
when the ignition switch is in ON position
NOTE: or the ignition mode is ON.
If you set the full blast warning sensitivity
higher than the pre-warning sensitivity in
the setting mode of the information display,
or the vehicle feels such shock as to be
able to trigger the full blast warning, the full
blast warning will be triggered preferen-
tially. In this case, the pre-warning will not
be triggered.

2-15

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Drivers side Lock switch


EXAMPLE CLOSE
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1)
(3)

(2) OPEN
(4)

56RH00221

The drivers door has a switch (1) to oper-


ate the drivers window, and a switch (2) to 81A009
56RH00223
operate the front passengers window or To open a window, push the top part of the
there are switches (3), (4), to operate the The drivers door also has a lock switch for
switch. To close the window, lift up the top the passengers window(s). When you
rear right and left passenger windows, part of the switch.
respectively. push in the lock switch, the passengers
The drivers window has AUTO-DOWN window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by
Passengers door and AUTO-UP (if equipped) features for operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)
greater convenience (at toll booths or or (5). To restore normal operation, release
EXAMPLE drive-through restaurants, for example). the lock switch by pushing it again.
These features allow the driver to open or
close the window without holding the win-
dow switch in DOWN or UP position. Press
down or lift up the drivers window switch
completely and release it. To stop the win-
dow before it reaches the FULL-DOWN or
FULL-UP position, pull up or push down
(5) the switch briefly.

56RH00222

The passengers door has a switch (5) to


operate the passengers window.

2-16

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Pinching prevention function


WARNING (if equipped) CAUTION
You should always lock the pas- The drivers window is equipped with a The pinching prevention function
sengers window operation when pinching prevention function. This function does not operate while you are
there are children in the vehicle. detects a foreign object that is caught in holding the window switch in UP
Children can be seriously injured if the window as it is being closed by AUTO- position.
they get part of their body caught UP feature, which allows you to close the The pinching prevention function
by the window during operation. window without holding the window switch may not detect an object caught in
To avoid injuring an occupant by in UP position, and stops the window from the window just before the window
closing to prevent damage.
window entrapment, check that no is fully closed.
part of the occupants body such as
hands or head is in the path of the WARNING
NOTE:
electric windows when closing To avoid injuring an occupant by win- Even if you cannot close the window by the
them. dow entrapment, check that no part AUTO-UP feature because there may be
Always remove the ignition key or of the occupants body such as something wrong with the pinching preven-
take the keyless push start system hands or head is in the path of the tion function, you can close the window by
remote controller with you when electric window when closing it. holding the window switch in UP position.
leaving the vehicle even only for a This function may not detect an If you drive in extreme off-road condition,
short time. Also do not leave chil- object due to the size, hardness, or the pinching prevention function may oper-
dren alone in a parked vehicle. position of the object being caught in ate accidentally because the window
Unattended children could use the the closing window. reacts to vehicle jolting.
electric window switches and get
trapped by the window. Pinching prevention function initializa-
tion
NOTE: When you disconnect and reconnect the
If you drive with one of the rear windows battery or replace the fuse, the function will
open, you may hear a loud sound caused be deactivated. In this condition, the
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open AUTO-DOWN feature will be deactivated,
the drivers or front passengers window, or while the AUTO-UP feature may remain
narrow the rear window opening. activated. The pinching prevention function
needs to be initialized.

2-17

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

To initialize the pinching prevention func- Mirrors To adjust the mirror, set the selector tab (1)
tion, use the following procedure: to the day position, and then move the mir-
1) Press the engine switch to change the Inside rearview mirror ror up, down or sideways by hand to obtain
ignition mode to ON. You can adjust the inside rearview mirror the best view.
2) Open the drivers window fully by hold- by hand to see the rear of your vehicle in When driving at night, you can move the
ing the window switch in DOWN posi- the mirror.
tion. selector tab to the night position to reduce
3) Close the drivers window by holding glare from the headlights of vehicles
Type A behind you.
the switch in UP position, and keep
holding the switch for 2 seconds after
the window is fully closed. WARNING
4) Check the drivers window to see if the Always adjust the mirror with the
AUTO-DOWN/UP feature works. selector set to the day position.
EXAMPLE Only use the night position if it is
WARNING 74LHT0235
necessary to reduce glare from the
Type B headlights of vehicles behind you.
Whenever you disconnect and recon-
Be aware that in this position you
nect the battery or replace the fuse,
may not be able to see some
the pinching prevention function
objects that could be seen in the
needs to be initialized.
day position.
The pinching prevention function will
not be activated until the initialization
is completed. EXAMPLE
68LMT0205
If the AUTO-DOWN/UP feature will not
work after initialization, there might be EXAMPLE
something wrong with the pinching preven-
tion function. Have your vehicle inspected
by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
(1)
(2) (3)
68LMT0206

(2) Day driving


(3) Night driving

2-18

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Outside rearview mirrors Electric mirrors (if equipped) Outside rearview mirror folding
switch (if equipped)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1)
EXAMPLE
(3)
(2)

(4)
(1)
(1)
(2) (3)

(4)

52RM20120 56RH00224
56RH00225
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you The switch to control the electric mirrors is
can just see the side of your vehicle in the located on the drivers door panel. You can You can fold the mirrors when you park the
mirrors. adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch vehicle in a narrow space. When the igni-
is in ACC or ON position, or the ignition tion mode is ACC or ON, push the fold-
WARNING mode is ACC or ON. To adjust the mir- ing switch (1) to fold and unfold the
rors: mirrors. Check that the mirrors are com-
Be careful when judging the size or pletely unfolded before you start driving.
distance of a vehicle or other object 1) Rotate the selector switch to the left or
seen in the side convex mirror. Be right to select the mirror you wish to
aware that objects look smaller and adjust. CAUTION
appear farther away than when seen 2) Push the side of the switch that corre- Moving mirrors can pinch and injure
in a flat mirror. sponds to the direction in which you a hand. Do not allow anyones hand
wish to move the mirror. to get near the mirrors when folding
3) Return the selector switch to the center and unfolding the mirrors.
position to help prevent unintended mir-
ror movement.

2-19

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Front seats
Seat adjustment
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the drivers
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex-
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Check that the drivers seat and seat-
back are properly adjusted before
you start driving.

WARNING
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
which reduces the effectiveness of
the seat belts as a safety device,
check that the seats are adjusted
before the seat belts are fastened.

WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
mum protection when seatbacks are
in the upright position.

2-20

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Seat position adjustment lever (1)


EXAMPLE Pull the lever up and slide the seat.

Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)


Pull the lever up and move the seatback.

Seat height adjustment lever (3)


(if equipped)
Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the
lever down to lower the seat.

After adjustment, move the seat and seat-


back back and forth to check if it is
securely latched.

(2)

(3)

(1)

56RH00226

2-21

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Head restraints (Adjustable type) NOTE: Rear seats


(if equipped) It may be necessary to recline the seat-
back to provide enough overhead clear- Head restraints (if equipped)
EXAMPLE ance to remove the head restraint. Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
Front of an accident.

WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.

Adjust the head restraint to the position


which places the center of the head
80J001 restraint closest to the top of your ears. If
this is not possible for very tall passengers,
Head restraints are designed to help adjust the head restraint as high as possi-
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case EXAMPLE
ble.
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to 75RM004
the position which places the center of the To raise the front head restraint, pull
head restraint closest to the top of your upward the head restraint until it clicks. To
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas- lower the head restraint, push down the
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high head restraint while holding in the lock
as possible. lever. If a head restraint must be removed
(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in
WARNING the lock lever and pull the head restraint all
Never drive the vehicle with the the way out.
head restraints removed.
Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.

2-22

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Rear Seat belts and child restraint


EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE systems
EXAMPLE

Above the pelvis

65D606
61MM0A033

To raise the rear head restraint, pull


upward the head restraint until it clicks. To 65D231S
WARNING
lower the head restraint, push down the Never allow persons to ride in the
head restraint while holding in the lock cargo area of a vehicle. In the event
lever. If a head restraint must be removed WARNING
of an accident, there is a much
(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in Wear your seat belts at all times. greater risk of injury for persons
the lock lever and pull the head restraint all who are not riding in a seat with
the way out. their seat belt securely fastened.
WARNING Seat belts should always be
When installing a child restraint system,
adjust the height of the head restraint or An air bag supplements or adds to adjusted as follows:
remove it for fitting the child restraint, as the frontal crash protection offered the lap portion of the belt should
necessary. by seat belts. The driver and all pas- be worn low across the pelvis,
sengers must be properly restrained not across the waist.
by fastening seat belts at all times, the shoulder straps should be
whether or not an air bag is mounted worn on the outside shoulder
at their seating position, to minimize only, and never under the arm.
the risk of severe injury or death in the shoulder straps should be
the event of a crash. away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
(Continued)

2-23

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE WARNING


(Continued)
Never use the same seat belt for
more than one occupant and never
as low as possible attach a seat belt over an infant or
across the hips child being held on an occupants
Across the pelvis lap. Such seat belt use could cause
serious injury in the event of an
accident.
Periodically inspect seat belt
assemblies for excessive wear and
damage. Seat belts should be
65D201 65D199
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged
in any way. It is essential to replace
WARNING WARNING the entire seat belt assembly after it
(Continued) (Continued) has been worn in a severe impact,
Seat belts should never be worn Pregnant women should use seat even if damage to the assembly is
with the straps twisted and should belts, although specific recommen- not obvious.
be adjusted as tightly as is com- dations about driving should be Children aged 12 and under should
fortable to provide the protection made by the womans medical advi- ride properly restrained in the rear
for which they have been designed. sor. Remember that the lap portion seat.
A slack belt will provide less pro- of the belt should be worn as low Infants and small children should
tection than a snug belt. as possible across the hips, as never be transported unless they
Check that each seat belt buckle is shown in the illustration. are properly restrained. Restraint
inserted into the proper buckle Do not fasten your seat belt over systems for infants and small chil-
catch. It is possible to cross the hard or breakable objects in your dren can be purchased locally and
buckles in the rear seat. pockets or on your clothing. If an should be used. Check that the
(Continued) accident occurs, objects such as system you purchase meets appli-
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat cable safety standards. Read and
belt can cause injury. follow all the directions provided
(Continued) by the manufacturer.
(Continued)

2-24

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Lap-shoulder belt
WARNING EXAMPLE
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
(Continued) The seat belt has an emergency locking Low on hips
For children, if the shoulder belt retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock
irritates the neck or face, move the the seat belt only during a sudden stop or
child closer to the center of the impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt
vehicle. across your body very quickly. If this hap-
Avoid contamination of seat belt pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, and
webbing by polishes, oils, chemi- then pull the belt across your body more
cals, and particularly battery acid. slowly.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. Safety reminder
Do not insert any items such as Sit up straight and
coins and clips into the seat belt fully back 60A040
buckles, and be careful not to spill
liquids into these parts. If foreign To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt
materials get into a seat belt during a crash, position the lap portion of
buckle, the seat belt may not work Low on hips the belt across your lap as low on your hips
properly. as possible and adjust it to a snug fit by
All seatbacks should always be in pulling the shoulder portion of the belt
an upright position when driving, upward through the latch plate. The length
or seat belt effectiveness may be of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself
reduced. Seat belts are designed to to allow freedom of movement.
offer maximum protection when
seatbacks are in the upright posi-
tion. EXAMPLE
60A038

2-25

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

All seat belts except rear center To unfasten the seat belt, push the red
All seat belts except rear center are the PRESS button on the buckle and retract TO LOOSEN
lap-shoulder belt. the belt slowly while holding the belt or/and
the latch plate.
EXAMPLE
Lap belt
Rear center seat belt
To fasten the belt, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your hips
and press it straight into the buckle until
you hear a click. To reduce the risk of
sliding under the belt during a collision, Right angle
position the belt across your lap as low on
your hips as possible and adjust it to a EXAMPLE
snug fit. 80JS029

To lengthen, release the latch plate from


60A036
TO TIGHTEN the buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) in
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and the direction of the arrow, at right angles to
far back into the seat, pull the latch plate the belt. The latch plate should then be
attached to the seat belt across your body refitted into the buckle and the belt tight-
and press it straight into the buckle until ened as previously described.
you hear a click.
Low on hips
EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE
80JS028

To tighten the belt, pull the free end of the


belt across alongside the lap strap.

60A039

2-26

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

To unfasten the belt, press the release but- Drivers seat belt reminder or brink and a buzzer will sound as a
ton on the buckle catch. reminder to the driver to buckle his or her
With tachometer seat belt. For more details, refer to the
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE explanation below.
If the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled
when the ignition switch is turned to ON
position or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to ON. The
reminder works as follows:
1) The drivers seat belt reminder light will
come on.
2) After the vehicles speed has reached
about 15 km/h, the drivers seat belt
reminder light will blink and a buzzer
will sound for about 95 seconds.
79MH0239
3) After step 2) has finished, the reminder
56RH00227
light will remain on until the drivers seat
NOTE: Without tachometer belt is buckled.
The word CENTER is marked on the EXAMPLE
buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt
are designed so a latch plate cannot be and later unbuckles the seat belt, the
inserted into the wrong buckle. reminder system will be activated from
step 1) or step 2) according to the vehicles
speed. When the vehicles speed is below
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
step 1). When the vehicles speed is above
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
step 2).

The reminder will be automatically can-


celed when the drivers seat belt is buckled
or the ignition switch is turned off, or the
56RH00228 engine switch is pressed to change the
When the driver does not buckle his or her ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).
seat belt, the drivers seat belt reminder
light in the instrument cluster will come on

2-27

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Infant restraint - rear seat only


WARNING WARNING
EXAMPLE
It is absolutely essential that the Inspect all seat belt assemblies after
driver and passengers fasten their any crash. Any seat belt assembly
seat belts at all times. Persons who which was in use during a crash
are not fastening seat belts have a (other than a very minor one) should
much greater risk of injury if an acci- be replaced, even if damage to the
dent occurs. Make a regular habit of assembly is not obvious. Any seat
buckling your seat belt before putting belt assembly which was not in use
the key in the ignition or pressing the during a crash should be replaced if
engine switch. it does not function properly, it is
damaged in any way or the seat belt
Seat belt inspection pretensioners were activated (that is,
if the front air bags were activated).
80JC007
EXAMPLE
Child restraint systems Child restraint

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

65D209S

Periodically check if the seat belts work


properly and are not damaged. Check the 80JC016
60G332S
webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and guide loops. Replace any The following types of child restraint sys-
seat belts which do not work properly or tem are available generally.
are damaged.

2-28

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Booster seat adjust the passengers seat as far back as


possible. WARNING
EXAMPLE
NOTE: If you install a child restraint system
Observe any statutory regulation about in the rear seat, slide the front seat
child restraints. far enough forward so that the childs
feet do not touch the front seatback.
EXAMPLE This will help avoid injury to the child
in the event of an accident.

EXAMPLE

80JC008

MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends that


you use a child restraint system to restrain
infants and small children. Many different
types of child restraint systems are avail-
able; check that the restraint system you 58MS030

select meets applicable safety standards.


WARNING
All child restraint systems are designed to
If your vehicle is equipped with a
be secured in vehicle seats either by seat 65D608
front passenger air bag, do not install
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
a rear-facing child restraint in the
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower
front passengers seat. If the passen-
anchor bars built into the seat. Whenever
gers air bag inflates, a child in a rear-
possible, MARUTI SUZUKI recommends
facing child restraint could be killed
that child restraint systems be installed on
or seriously injured. The back of a
the rear seat. According to accident statis-
rear-facing child restraint would be
tics, children are safer when properly
too close to the inflating air bag.
restrained in rear seating positions than in
front seating positions.
If you must use a front-facing child
restraint in the front passengers seat,

2-29

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Installation with lap-shoulder seat ELR type belt


EXAMPLE belts EXAMPLE
CAUTION
If you can adjust the position of rear
head restraint (if equipped), adjust
the height of the rear head restraint
or remove it for fitting the child
restraint, as necessary. However, if a
booster cushion not equipped with
the head restraint is fitted, the rear
seat head restraint should not be
removed. If the rear head restraint is
65D609
removed for fitting the child restraint,
you need to install it again after 80JC021

WARNING removing the child restraint. Install your child restraint system accord-
If the child restraint is fitted improp- ing to the instructions provided by the child
Children could be endangered in a erly, a child sitting in it could be
crash if their child restraint systems restraint system manufacturer.
injured in a crash.
are not properly secured in the vehi- Check that the seat belt is securely
cle. When installing a child restraint latched.
system, follow the instructions NOTE:
Move the child restraint system in all direc-
below. Secure the child in the Stow the removed head restraint (if
tions to check that it is securely installed.
restraint system according to the equipped) in the trunk so it will not cause
When you put your child in the child
manufacturers instructions. inconvenience to the occupants.
restraint system, appropriately slide the
front seat forward not to touch a part of
WARNING your childs body.
In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could
fall forward. If there is a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
center seating position, the falling
armrest could injure the child. Do not
install a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear center seating position.

2-30

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Installation with a lap belt Installation with ISOFIX type restraint system in all directions especially
EXAMPLE anchorages forward to check that connecting bars are
securely latched to the anchorages.

Type A EXAMPLE

Pull to tighten

60G132A
EXAMPLE 56RH00270
Install your child restraint system accord- 56RH00229
ing to the instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer. Your vehicle is equipped with the lower Type B EXAMPLE
anchorages in the rear seat outboard seat-
ing positions for securing a ISOFIX type of
To lengthen or tighten the belt, refer to the child restraints with the connecting bars.
Lap-belt item in this Seat belts and child The lower anchorages are located where
restraint systems section. After checking the rear of the seat cushion meets the bot-
that the seat belt is securely latched, try tom of the seatback.
moving the child restraint system in all
directions, to check it is securely installed. WARNING
If you need to tighten the belt, pull the free
end of the webbing. Install the ISOFIX type of child
restraint(s) in the only outboard seat-
ing positions, not in the central posi- 56RH00271
tion for the rear seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with the top tether
anchorages. Use the top tether strap of the
Install the ISOFIX type child restraint sys- child restraint according to the instructions
tem according to the instructions provided provided by the child restraint system man-
by the child restraint system manufacturer. ufacturer.
After installation, try moving the child

2-31

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Here is a general instruction: 1) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,
inserting the connecting bars to the EXAMPLE
CAUTION anchorages between the seat cushion
and the seatback.
If you can adjust the position of rear
head restraint, adjust the height of EXAMPLE
the rear head restraint or remove it
for fitting the child restraint, as nec-
essary. However, if a booster cushion
not equipped with the head restraint
is fitted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting
the child restraint, you need to install
it again after removing the child 54G185
68LM268
restraint.
If the child restraint is fitted improp- 2) Use your hands to carefully align the 4) Grasp the front of the child restraint and
erly, a child sitting in it could be connecting bar tips with the anchor- push the child restraint forcefully to
injured in a crash. ages. Take care not to pinch your fin- latch the connecting bars. Check that
gers. they are securely latched by trying to
NOTE: move the child restraint system in all
Stow the removed head restraint in the EXAMPLE directions, especially forward.
trunk so it will not cause inconvenience to 5) Attach the top tether strap referring to
the occupants. Installation of child restraint with top
tether section.
EXAMPLE When you put your child in the child
restraint system, appropriately slide the
front seat forward not to touch a part of
your childs body.

NOTICE
54G184
When installing a child restraint sys-
3) Push the child restraint toward the anchor- tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
ages so that the connecting bar tips are seat position so that the front seat
partially hooked to the anchorages. Use does not interfere with the child
your hands to confirm the position. restraint system.
78F114

2-32

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Installation of child restraint with Some child restraint systems require the
top tether Type A EXAMPLE use of a top tether strap. Top tether anchor-
age brackets are provided in your vehicle at
CAUTION the locations shown in the illustrations.
The number of the top tether anchorage
If you can adjust the position of rear brackets provided in your vehicle depends
head restraint, adjust the height of on the vehicle specification. Install the child
the rear head restraint or remove it restraint system as follows:
for fitting the child restraint, as nec-
essary. However, if a booster cushion 1) If you can adjust the position of head
not equipped with the head restraint restraint, raise the head restraint to the
is fitted, the rear seat head restraint most upper position.
should not be removed. If the rear 2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting seat using the procedure described
the child restraint, you need to install above for securing a restraint system
it again after removing the child 56RH00230 that does not require a top tether strap.
restraint. 3) Open the cover that is marked with the
If the child restraint is fitted improp- top tether anchorage bracket symbol to
erly, a child sitting in it could be Type B EXAMPLE access the top tether anchorage
injured in a crash. bracket. Close the cover when not
using the top tether anchorage bracket.
NOTE: 4) Hook the top tether strap to the top
Stow the removed head restraint in the tether anchorage bracket and tighten
trunk so it will not cause inconvenience to the top tether strap according to the
the occupants. instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer. Attach
the top tether strap to the correspond-
ing top tether anchorage bracket
located directly behind the child
restraint. Do not attach the top tether
strap to the luggage restraint loops (if
56RH00231
equipped).

2-33

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING NOTICE
Do not attach the child restraint top When installing a child restraint sys-
tether strap to the luggage restraint tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
loops (if equipped). Incorrectly seat position so that the front seat
attached top tether strap will reduce does not interfere with the child
the intended effectiveness of the restraint system.
child restraint system.
NOTE:
EXAMPLE Maruti Suzuki recommends use of Maruti
Type A Suzuki Genuine accessory of Child seat,
ISOFIX.

Type B

86G032

5) When routing the top tether strap, pass


the top strap as shown in the illustra-
tion. (Refer to Head restraints section
for details on how to adjust height of
head restraint or remove it.)

2-34

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Child Restraint System for India


Child Restraint
The suitability of each passengers seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below.
Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child
restraints, referring to the table.

Seating position (or other site)


MASS GROUP Front Rear Rear Intermediate Intermediate
Passenger Outboard Centre Outboard Centre

Group 0 X U X N.A. N.A.


Up to 10 kg
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group I X U X N.A. N.A.


9 to 18 kg
Group II X U X N.A. N.A.
15 to 25 kg
Group III
X U X N.A. N.A.
22 to 36 kg

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:


U =Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
X =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
N.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group.
NOTE: universal is the category in the AIS 072.
: Outboard indicates window side seat.

2-35

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Seat belt pretensioner system Read this section and Supplemental Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do
restraint system (air bags) section to learn not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the
EXAMPLE more about the pretensioner system. belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn
low across the pelvis, not across the waist.
The seat belt pretensioner system works Please refer to Seat adjustment section
with the supplemental restraint system (air and the instructions and precautions about
bags). The crash sensors and the elec- the seat belts in this Seat belts and child
tronic controller of the air bag system also restraint systems section for details on
control the seat belt pretensioners. The proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
pretensioners are triggered only when
there is a frontal crash severe enough to Please note that the pretensioners along
11
11 trigger the air bags and the seat belts are with the air bags will activate in severe
fastened. For precautions and general frontal crashes. They are not designed to
Label information including servicing the preten- activate in rear impacts, side impacts, roll-
sioner system, refer to Supplemental overs, or minor frontal side crashes. The
restraint system (air bags) section in addi- pretensioners can be activated only once.
56RM02001
tion to this Seat belt pretensioner system If the pretensioners are activated (that is, if
section, and follow all those precautions. the air bags are activated), have the pre-
WARNING tensioner system serviced by an autho-
The pretensioner is located in each front
This section describes your MARUTI seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight- rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as
SUZUKI vehicles seat belt preten- ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu- possible.
sioner system. Read and follow all pants body more snugly in the event of a
these instructions carefully to mini- frontal crash. The retractors will remain If AIR BAG light on the instrument cluster
mize your risk of severe injury or locked after the pretensioners are acti- does not blink or come on briefly when the
death. vated. Upon activation, some noise will ignition switch is turned to ON position or
occur and some smoke may be released. the engine switch is pressed to change the
To determine if your vehicle is equipped These conditions are not harmful and do ignition mode to ON, stays on for more
with a seat belt pretensioner system at the not indicate a fire in the vehicle. than 10 seconds, or comes on while driv-
front seating positions, check the label on ing, the pretensioner system or the air bag
the seat belt at the bottom part. If the let- The driver and all passengers must be system may not work properly. Have both
ters E11 appear as illustrated, your vehi- properly restrained by fastening seat belts systems inspected by an authorised Maruti
cle is equipped with the seat belt at all times, whether or not a pretensioner Suzuki workshop as soon as possible.
pretensioner system. You can use the pre- is equipped at their seating position, to
tensioner seat belts in the same manner as minimize the risk of severe injury or death Service on or around the pretensioner sys-
ordinary seat belts. in the event of a crash. tem components or wiring must be per-
formed only by an authorised Maruti

2-36

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Suzuki workshop who is specially trained.


Improper service could result in unin-
tended activation of pretensioners or could
render the pretensioner inoperative. Either
of these two conditions may result in per-
sonal injury.

To prevent damage or unintended activa-


tion of the pretensioners, check that the
battery is disconnected and the ignition
switch has been in LOCK position or the
ignition mode has been LOCK (OFF) for
at least 90 seconds before performing any
electrical service work on your MARUTI
SUZUKI vehicle.

Do not touch pretensioner system compo-


nents or wiring. The wires are wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle, ask an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop, body repair
shop, or scrap yard for assistance.

2-37

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Supplemental restraint
system (air bags) EXAMPLE

WARNING (2)
This section describes the protection (1)
provided by your MARUTI SUZUKI
vehicles supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bags). Read and follow all
instructions carefully to minimize
your risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-


mental restraint system consisting of the
following components in addition to a lap-
shoulder belt at each seating position. (5)

(1) Drivers front air bag module (4)


(2) Front passengers front air bag mod-
ule (3)
(3) Front seat belt pretensioners
(4) Air bag controller
(5) Forward crash sensor

56RH00232

2-38

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Air bag symbol meaning Front air bags


WARNING EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
An air bag supplements or adds to
the crash protection offered by seat
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by fas-
tening seat belts at all times, whether
or not an air bag is mounted at their
seating position, to minimize the risk
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.

AIR BAG light


63J113

72M00150 Front air bags are designed to inflate in


severe frontal crashes when the ignition
You may find this label on the sun visor.
switch is in ON position or the ignition
mode is ON.
WARNING
63J030
NEVER use a rearward facing child Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
If AIR BAG light on the instrument cluster restraint on a seat protected by an rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
does not blink or come on when the igni- ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH minor frontal crashes, since they would
tion switch is first turned to ON position, or or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD offer no protection in those types of acci-
the ignition mode is first changed to ON, can occur. dents. Since an air bag deploys only one
or AIR BAG light stays on, or comes on time during an accident, seat belts are
while driving, the air bag system (or the needed to restrain occupants from further
seat belt pretensioner system) may not movements during the accident.
work properly. Have the air bag system
inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop as soon as possible.

2-39

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Therefore, an air bag is not a substitute for Front passengers front air bag
seat belts. To maximize your protection, EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
always fasten your seat belts. Be aware
that no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.

Drivers front air bag

58MS030
56RH00234

The drivers front air bag is located behind


the center pad of the steering wheel and WARNING
the front passengers front air bag is Do not install a rear-facing child
located behind the passengers side of the restraint in the front passengers
dashboard. seat. If the passengers front air bag
EXAMPLE The words SRS AIRBAG are molded into inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
56RH00233 the air bag covers to identify the location of restraint could be killed or severely
the air bags. injured. The back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag.

Refer to Seat belts and child restraint sys-


tems section for details on securing your
child.

2-40

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Conditions of front air bags deployment Conditions of front air bags may inflate
(inflation) Receiving a strong impact to the lower EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE body of your vehicle, the front air bags may
inflate.

EXAMPLE

80J101

80J097
Landing hard or falling.
Frontal crash with a fixed wall that does Front air bags may not inflate
not move or deform at more than about 80J099 The front air bags may not inflate when a
25 km/h. Hitting a curb or medial strip. strong impact has not occurred since the
crash object was easy to be deformed or
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE moved, or the crashed portion of your vehi-
(1) cle was easy to be deformed.
Also, front air bags may not inflate in many
cases when the crash angle is greater than
about 30 degrees at left and right angles
(1) from the front of your vehicle.

EXAMPLE
80J098E
80J100E
Strong impact equivalent to frontal crash Falling into a deep hole or ditch.
such as above at left and right angles of
about 30 degrees (1) or less from the
front of your vehicle.

80J102

Frontal crash to a stopped vehicle at less


than about 50 km/h.

2-41

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Crash with a fixed wall or guardrail at left


EXAMPLE and right angles of greater than about 30 EXAMPLE
degrees (1) from the front of your vehi-
cle.

EXAMPLE

80J103
80J119
Crash that the front of your vehicle goes Impact from the side.
under the bed of a truck etc.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE 80J106

Frontal crash with a fixed wall that does


not move or deform at less than about
25 km/h.

Front air bags do not inflate


Front air bags do not inflate in rear
impacts, side impacts or rollovers, etc. 80J110
However, these might inflate in a strong
80J104 Vehicle rollover.
impact.
Crash with a utility pole or stumpage.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)

80J120
80J105E
Impact from the rear.

2-42

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

How the system works tion and Seat belts and child restraint sys-
In a frontal crash, the crash sensors will tems section in this section for details on WARNING
detect rapid deceleration, and if the con- proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
troller judges that the deceleration rep- (Continued)
Do not attach any objects to, or
resents a severe frontal crash, the EXAMPLE place any objects over, the steering
controller will trigger the inflators. The infla-
tors inflate the appropriate air bags with wheel or dashboard. Do not place
nitrogen or argon gas. The inflated air any objects between the air bag
bags provide a cushion for your head and and the driver or front passenger.
upper body. The air bag inflates and These objects may interfere with air
deflates so quickly that you may not even bag operation or may be propelled
realize that it has activated. The air bag will by the air bag in the event of a
neither hinder your view nor make it harder crash. Either of these conditions
to exit the vehicle. may cause severe injury.

Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully Even though your vehicle is moderately
in order to reduce the chance of serious or damaged by a crash, it may not be severe
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable enough to trigger air bags to inflate. If your
65D610 vehicle sustains any front-end or side dam-
consequence of the quick inflation is that
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as age, have the air bag system inspected by
the facial area against a front air bag. Also, WARNING an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and ensure that it works properly.
The driver should not lean over the
some powder and smoke will be released. steering wheel. The front passen- Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic
These conditions are not harmful and do ger should not rest his or her body module which records information about
not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware, against the dashboard, or other- the air bag system if the air bags deploy in
however, that some air bag components wise get too close to the dash- a crash. The module records information
may be hot for a while after inflation. board. In these situations, the out- about overall system status, and which
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper of-position occupant would be too sensors activated the deployment, and for
position for maximum protection when an close to an inflating air bag, and a certain vehicle only, whether the drivers
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far may suffer severe injury. seat belt was in use.
back as possible while still maintaining (Continued)
control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your
seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the
steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-
pants should not lean on or sleep against
the door. Refer to Seat adjustment sec-

2-43

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Servicing the air bag system with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags couplers are yellow for easy identification.
and related components replaced by an
Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as
air bag can be hazardous. Ask an autho-
soon as possible.
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop, body repair
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and shop or scrap yard for help with disposal.
the drivers floor is submerged, the air bag
controller could be damaged. If this hap-
pens, ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop to check the air bag system as
soon as possible.
Special procedures are required for servic-
ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-
son, only an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop should be allowed to service or
replace your air bags. Remind anyone who
services your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle
that it has air bags.
Service on or around air bag components
or wiring must be performed only by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Improper service could result in unin-
tended air bag deployment or could render
the air bag inoperative. Either of these two
conditions may result in severe injury.
To prevent damage or unintended inflation
of the air bag system, check that the bat-
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch
has been in LOCK position or the ignition
mode has been LOCK (OFF) for at least
90 seconds before performing any electri-
cal service work on your MARUTI SUZUKI
vehicle. Do not touch air bag system com-
ponents or wires. The wires are wrapped

2-44

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Instrument cluster (Type A) (if equipped)


1. Speedometer
2. Fuel gauge
3. Information display
4. Trip meter selector knob
5. Indicator selector knob
6. Warning and indicator lights

EXAMPLE 6 1 6

4 3 2 5
56RH00235

2-45

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Speedometer NOTE: Brightness control


The activation point of the low fuel warning
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
light (1) varies depending on road condi-
tions (for example, slope or curve) and
Fuel gauge driving conditions because of fuel move-
ment in the tank.

Refer to Low fuel warning light in Warn-


ing and indicator lights in this section for
details.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
(2) door is located on the left side of the vehi-
cle. (1)
(1) EXAMPLE
56RH00263

When the position lights and/or headlights


EXAMPLE are on, the instrument panel lights come
52RM20470 on.
When the ignition switch is in ON posi- Your vehicle has a system to automatically
tion, this gauge give a rough indication of dim the brightness of the instrument panel
the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. F lights when the position lights or headlights
stands for full and E stands for empty. are on.
If the fuel meter indicator shows only one When the position lights and/or headlights
segment to E, refill the tank as soon as are on, you can adjust the meter illumina-
possible. tion brightness.

NOTE: To increase the brightness of the instru-


If the last segment blinks, it means that the ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-
fuel is almost empty. tor knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on, panel lights, turn the indicator selector
refill the fuel tank immediately. knob (1) counterclockwise.

2-46

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Information display The information display shows the follow-


WARNING Information display is shown when the igni- ing information.
Do not adjust the brightness of the tion switch is turned to ON position. Display (A)
instrument panel lights while driving. Clock
Display (B)
NOTE: Trip meter / Odometer / Instantaneous fuel
If you do not turn the knob within several consumption / Average fuel consumption /
seconds of activating, the brightness Driving range
control display will be canceled automat-
ically. Display (C)
When you reconnect the battery, the Gearshift indicator (if equipped) / Setting
brightness of the instrument panel lights mode
will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-
ness according to your preference. Display (A) : Clock
(1) (2) The display (A) shows the time.
NOTE: To change the time indication:
If you adjust to the maximum brightness
EXAMPLE
56RH00264 1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)
level when the position lights or headlights and the indicator selector knob (2)
are on, the following functions will be can- (1) Trip meter selector knob together.
celled. (2) Indicator selector knob 2) To change the hour indication, turn the
The function which automatically dims indicator selector knob (2) left or right
the brightness of instrument panel lights EXAMPLE repeatedly when the hour indication
The function which operates with the blinks. To change the hour indication
brightness control, except maximum quickly, turn and hold the indicator
brightness level selector knob (2). To set the hour indi-
cation, push the indicator selector knob
(A) (2) and the minute indication will blink.
(C) (B) 3) To change the minute indication, turn
the indicator selector knob (2) left or
right repeatedly when the minute indi-
(3) cation blinks. To change the minute
indication quickly, turn and hold the
56RH00240 indicator selector knob (2). To set the
(3) Information display minute indication, push the indicator
selector knob (2).

2-47

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

To select 12/24H format, refer to setting (a) Trip meter A


mode in this section. EXAMPLE (b) Trip meter B
(c) Odometer
WARNING (d) Average fuel consumption
(a) (e) Driving range
If you attempt to adjust the display (f) Instantaneous fuel consumption
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the display (b) If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Display (B) : Do not attempt to adjust the display
Trip meter / Odometer / Instanta- (c) while driving.
neous fuel consumption / Average
fuel consumption / Driving range NOTE:
The display (B) shows one of the following Indications will change when you push
indications, trip meter A, trip meter B, and release a knob.
odometer, instantaneous fuel consump- (d)
The display shows estimated values.
tion, average fuel consumption or driving Indications may not be the same as
range. actual values.
To switch the display indication (B), push
(e)
the trip meter selector knob (1) or the indi-
cator selector knob (2) quickly.

(f)

56RH00269

Push the trip meter selector


knob (1).
Push the indicator selector
knob (2).

2-48

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Trip meter Instantaneous fuel consumption Average fuel consumption


The trip meter can be used to measure the The display shows the value of instanta- If you selected average fuel consumption
distance traveled on short trips or between neous fuel consumption only when the the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-
fuel stops. vehicle is moving. play shows the last value of average fuel
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B consumption from previous driving when
independently. NOTE: the ignition switch is turned to ON posi-
The display does not show the value tion. Unless you reset the value of average
To reset the trip meter, push and hold the unless the vehicle is moving. fuel consumption, the display indicates the
trip meter selector knob (1) until the display Depending on the vehicles specification, value of average fuel consumption which
shows 0.0. the fuel consumption units of initial set- includes average fuel consumption during
ting are indicated as L/100km or km/L. previous driving.
NOTE: For L/100km setting, the indicated
The indicated maximum value of the trip To reset the average fuel consumption,
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the push and hold the indicator selector knob
consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
maximum value, the indicated value will (2) for a while when the display shows the
be indicated on the display even if the
return to 0.0. average fuel consumption.
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
Odometer NOTE:
For km/L setting, the indicated maxi-
The odometer records the total distance When you reset the indication or reconnect
mum value of instantaneous fuel con-
the vehicle has been driven. the negative () terminal to the battery, the
sumption is 50. No more than 50 will be
value of average fuel consumption will be
indicated on the display even if the
NOTICE actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
shown after driving for a while.
Keep track of your odometer reading lower.
and check the maintenance sched- The indication on the display may be
ule regularly for required services. delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
Increased wear or damage to certain affected by driving conditions.
parts can result from failure to per- The display shows estimated values.
form required services at the proper Indications may not be the same as
mileage intervals. actual values.
For L/100km or km/L setting, you can
change the units that instantaneous fuel
consumption is displayed in. Refer to
Average fuel consumption in this sec-
tion.

2-49

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

(For L/100km or km/L setting) Driving range Display (C) : Gearshift indicator
To change the unit of average fuel con- If you selected driving range the last time (if equipped)
sumption, while pushing and holding the you drove the vehicle, the display indicates The display (C) show the gearshift indica-
trip meter selector knob (1), turn the indica- --- for a few seconds and then indicates tor.
tor selector knob (2). the current driving range when the ignition
switch is turned to ON position. EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
(Initial setting) until the fuel gauge indicates E, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on, 56RH00272
the display --- will appear.
Refer to Gearshift Indicator in the
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section.
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
value of driving range shown in the display.
When you refuel, the driving range is
updated. However, if you only add a small
68PH02207 amount of fuel the correct value will not be
NOTE: displayed.
When you change the units that average
fuel consumption is displayed in, the NOTE:
instantaneous fuel consumption units will If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
be changed automatically. ON position, the driving range may not
indicate the correct value.
When you reconnect the negative ()
terminal to the battery, the value of driv-
ing range will be shown after driving for a
while.

2-50

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Display (C) : Setting mode


In the setting mode, you can set up and customize the following functions.

Indication Functions
Time indication of clock

Additional flashes of the turn signal

Initialization setting

Exit the setting mode

How to operate the setting mode:


Turn the indicator selector knob 1) When the ignition switch is in ON position and the vehicle is stationary, push and hold
(2). the indicator selector knob (2) until the display shows .
2) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (2) to select a function that you want to set
up according to the above chart.
Push the indicator selector 3) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (2) to register settings of the following func-
knob (2). tions.

NOTE:
Depending on vehicles specifications,
some items may not be displayed.

2-51

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Initialization setting
EXAMPLE : Initialize all settings

How to exit the setting mode:


Switch the display to show and then
push the indicator selector knob (2).

68PM00272

NOTE:
As shown in the above illustration,
indicates on the display of currently set-
ting item.
To go back to the higher level display
during operation, turn the indicator
selector knob (2) to display or
and then push the indicator
selector knob (2).

Time indication of clock


: 12-hour format (default setting)
: 24-hour format

Additional flashes
of the turn signal
: Turn signal flashes three
times after the turn signal
lever is returned (default set-
ting)
: Disable the additional flashes
of turn signal

2-52

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Instrument cluster (Type B) (if equipped)


1. Speedometer
2. Tachometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Information display
5. Trip meter selector knob
6. Indicator selector knob
7. Warning and indicator lights

EXAMPLE 7 2 7 1

5 3 4 6
56RM02006

2-53

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Speedometer Fuel gauge NOTE:


The activation point of the low fuel warning
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
light (1) varies depending on road condi-
tions (for example, slope or curve) and
Tachometer driving conditions because of fuel move-
The tachometer indicates engine speed in ment in the tank.
revolutions per minute.
Refer to Low fuel warning light in Warn-
NOTICE (2) ing and indicator lights in this section for
details.
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or (1) The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
severe engine damage can result. door is located on the left side of the vehi-
Keep the engine speed below the red cle.
zone even when downshifting to a
lower gear position. EXAMPLE
Refer to Downshifting maximum 52RM20470
allowable speeds in OPERATING When the ignition switch is in ON position
YOUR VEHICLE section. or the ignition mode is ON, this gauge
gives a rough indication of the amount of
fuel in the fuel tank. F stands for full and
E stands for empty.
If the fuel meter indicator shows only one
segment to E, refill the tank as soon as
possible.

NOTE:
If the last segment blinks, it means that the
fuel is almost empty.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,


refill the fuel tank immediately.

2-54

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Brightness control To reduce the brightness of the instrument Information display


panel lights, turn the indicator selector
The information display is shown when the
knob (1) counterclockwise.
EXAMPLE ignition switch is in ON position or the
ignition mode is ON.
WARNING
Do not adjust the brightness of the EXAMPLE
instrument panel lights while driving.

NOTE:
If you do not turn the knob within several
seconds of activating, the brightness
control display will be canceled automat-
ically.
(1) When you reconnect the battery, the
brightness of the instrument panel lights
56RH00239 will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright- (1) (2)
When the ignition switch is turned to ON ness according to your preference. 56RH00242
position or the ignition mode is ON, the (1) Trip meter selector knob
instrument panel lights come on. NOTE: (2) Indicator selector knob
If you adjust to the maximum brightness
Your vehicle has a system to automatically level when the position lights or headlights
dim the brightness of the instrument panel are on, the following functions will be can-
lights when the position lights or headlights celled.
are on. (A) (B)
The function which automatically dims
When the position lights and/or headlights the brightness of instrument panel lights (C)
are on, you can adjust the meter illumina- The function which operates with the
brightness control, except maximum (D)
tion brightness.
brightness level (E)
To increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-
tor knob (1) clockwise.
(3)
EXAMPLE
56RH00241

(3) Information display

2-55

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

The information display shows the follow- cation, push the indicator selector knob Display (B) : Thermometer
ing information. (2) and the minute indication will flash. The display (B) shows the thermometer.
3) To change the minute indication, turn The thermometer indicates the outside
Display (A) the indicator selector knob (2) left or temperature.
Clock right repeatedly when the minute indi-
Display (B) cation blinks. To change the minute EXAMPLE
Thermometer indication quickly, turn and hold the (a)
indicator selector knob (2). To set the
Display (C) minute indication, push the indicator
Keyless push start system remote control- selector knob (2).
ler battery consumption warning indicator
(for vehicles with keyless push start sys- To select 12/24H format, refer to setting
tem) mode in this section. 68PH02214
Display (D) If the outside temperature nears freezing
Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear Shift WARNING condition, the mark (a) will appear on the
vehicles) (if equipped) / Gearshift indicator If you attempt to adjust the display display.
(if equipped) while driving, you could lose control
Display (E) of the vehicle. NOTE:
Trip meter / Odometer / Instantaneous fuel Do not attempt to adjust the display The outside temperature indication is not
consumption / Average fuel consumption / while driving. the actual outside temperature when
Driving range / Setting mode driving at low speed, or when stopped.
NOTE: If there is something wrong with the ther-
Display (A) : Clock When you reconnect the negative () ter- mometer, or just after the ignition switch
The display (A) shows the time. minal to the battery, the clock indication will is turned to ON position or the engine
be reinitialized. Change the indication switch is pressed to change the ignition
To change the time indication: mode to ON, the display may not indi-
again to your preference.
1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1) cate the outside temperature.
and the indicator selector knob (2)
together.
2) To change the hour indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (2) left or right
repeatedly when the hour indication
blinks. To change the hour indication
quickly, turn and hold the indicator
selector knob (2). To set the hour indi-

2-56

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

When the display (E) shows the driving Display (C) : Display (D) :
range, you can change the unit of tem- Keyless push start system remote Gear position indicator (for Auto
perature. controller battery consumption Gear Shift vehicles) (if equipped) /
To change the unit of temperature, while warning indicator (if equipped) Gearshift indicator (if equipped)
pushing and holding the trip meter selector
knob (1), turn the indicator selector knob EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(2). (4)
EXAMPLE (6)
(5)
(Initial setting) 56RH00243

The display (D) shows some of the follow-


ing indications.
Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear
Shift vehicles) (if equipped)
56RH00265
The display shows the current gear posi-
The display (C) shows the keyless push tion (4).
start system remote controller battery con-
sumption warning indicator. If the remote Drive mode indicator:
68PM00273 controller becomes unreliable, this indica- When you are using the drive mode, the
tor comes on. display shows the drive mode indicator (5).
Manual mode indicator:
When you are using the manual mode, the
display shows the manual mode indicator
(6).
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to Using the transaxle in the
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section.

2-57

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Gearshift indicator (if equipped)


Refer to Gearshift Indicator in the EXAMPLE Push the trip meter selector
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE section. knob (1).

Display (E) : Push the indicator selector


(b) knob (2).
Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel con-
sumption / Driving range
The display (E) shows one of the following (b) Trip meter A
indications; trip meter A, trip meter B, (c) Trip meter B
odometer, instantaneous fuel consump- (c) (d) Odometer
tion, average fuel consumption or driving (e) Average fuel consumption
range. (f) Driving range
(g) Instantaneous fuel consumption
To switch the display indication (E), push
the trip meter selector knob (1) or the indi- (d) WARNING
cator selector knob (2) quickly.
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
(e) Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.

NOTE:
(f) Indications will change when you push
and release a knob.
The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
(g)

56RH00244

2-58

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Trip meter Instantaneous fuel consumption For L/100km or km/L setting, you can
The trip meter can be used to measure the If you selected instantaneous fuel con- change the units that instantaneous fuel
distance traveled on short trips or between sumption the last time you drove the vehi- consumption is displayed in. Refer to
fuel stops. cle, the display does not show the last Average fuel consumption in this sec-
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B value of instantaneous fuel consumption tion.
independently. from previous driving when the ignition
To reset the trip meter, push and hold the
switch is turned to ON position or the WARNING
engine switch is pressed to change the
trip meter selector knob (1) until the display ignition mode to ON. The display shows If you attempt to adjust the display
shows 0.0. the value only when the vehicle is moving. while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
NOTE: NOTE:
The indicated maximum value of the trip Do not attempt to adjust the display
The display does not show the value while driving.
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the unless the vehicle is moving.
maximum value, the indicated value will Depending on the vehicles specification,
return to 0.0. NOTE:
the fuel consumption units of initial set- When you reconnect the negative () ter-
ting are indicated as L/100km or km/L. minal to the battery, the clock indication will
Odometer For L/100km setting, the indicated
The odometer records the total distance be reinitialized. Change the indication
maximum value of instantaneous fuel again to your preference.
the vehicle has been driven. consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
be indicated on the display even if the Average fuel consumption
NOTICE actual instantaneous fuel consumption is If you selected average fuel consumption
Keep track of your odometer reading higher. the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-
and check the maintenance sched- For km/L setting, the indicated maxi- play shows the last value of average fuel
ule regularly for required services. mum value of instantaneous fuel con- consumption from previous driving when
Increased wear or damage to certain sumption is 50. No more than 50 will be the ignition switch is turned to ON posi-
parts can result from failure to per- indicated on the display even if the tion or the engine switch is pressed to
form required services at the proper actual instantaneous fuel consumption is change the ignition mode to ON. Unless
mileage intervals. lower. you reset the value of average fuel con-
The indication on the display may be sumption, the display indicates the value of
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly average fuel consumption which includes
affected by driving conditions. average fuel consumption during previous
The display shows estimated values. driving.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values. To reset the average fuel consumption,
push and hold the indicator selector knob

2-59

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

(2) for a while when the display shows the NOTE: NOTE:
average fuel consumption. When you change the units that average If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
fuel consumption is displayed in, the ON position or the ignition mode is
NOTE: instantaneous fuel consumption units will ON, the driving range may not indicate
When you reset the indication or reconnect be changed automatically. the correct value.
the negative () terminal to the battery, the When you reconnect the negative () When you reconnect the negative ()
value of average fuel consumption will be terminal to the battery, the unit of the terminal to the battery, the value of driv-
shown after driving for a while. average fuel consumption will be reini- ing range will be shown after driving for a
tialized. Change the unit again to your while.
(For L/100km or km/L setting) preference.
To change the unit of average fuel con-
sumption, while pushing and holding the Driving range
trip meter selector knob (1), turn the indica- If you selected driving range the last time
tor selector knob (2). you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
--- for a few seconds and then indicates
EXAMPLE the current driving range when the ignition
switch is turned to ON position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
(initial setting) ignition mode to ON.
The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
until the fuel gauge indicates E, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on,
the display --- will appear.
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
68PH02217
value of driving range shown in the display.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles specification, When you refuel, the driving range is
the fuel consumption units of initial setting updated. However, if you only add a small
are indicated as km/L or L/100km. amount of fuel the correct value will not be
displayed.

2-60

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Display (E) : Setting mode


In the setting mode, you can set up and customize the following functions.
Indication Functions
Time indication of clock

Central door locking system

Automatic door locking function (if equipped)

Automatic door unlocking function


(if equipped)

Door locking and unlocking siren


(if equipped)

Additional flashes of the turn signal

Lighting time of the To car function


(if equipped)

Lighting time of the To home function


(if equipped)

2-61

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Indication Functions
Shock sensor

Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor

Full blast warning sensitivity


of the shock sensor

Initialization setting

Exit the setting mode

How to operate the setting mode:


Turn the indicator selector knob 1) When the ignition switch is in the ON position or press the engine switch to change
(2). the ignition mode to ON and the vehicle is stationary, push and hold the indicator
selector knob (2) until the display shows .
2) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (2) to select a function that you want to
Push the indicator selector set up according to the above chart.
knob (2). 3) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (2) to register settings of the following
functions.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicles specifications,
some items may not be displayed.

2-62

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Automatic door locking function : Siren does not sound when


EXAMPLE (if equipped) the door(s) is(are) locked or
: Disable the automatic door unlocked by using the key-
locking function less entry system transmitter,
: Lock all doors when the vehi- keyless push start system
cle speed reaches 15 km/h remote controller or request
(default setting) switch
68PM00272
Automatic door unlocking Additional flashes
NOTE: function (if equipped) of the turn signal
As shown in the above illustration, : Disable the automatic door : Turn signal flashes three
indicates on the display of currently set- unlocking function times after the turn signal
ting item. (default setting of vehicle with lever is returned
To go back to the higher level display keyless push start system) (default setting)
during operation, turn the indicator : (Vehicle with keyless entry : Disable the additional flashes
selector knob (2) to display or system) of turn signal
and then push the indicator Unlock all doors when the key
selector knob (2). is pulled out from the ignition Lighting time of the To car function
switch (default setting of vehi- (if equipped)
Time indication of clock cle with keyless entry) : Disable the To car function
: 12-hour format (default set- : 10 seconds (default setting)
ting) (Vehicle with keyless push : 15 seconds
: 24-hour format start system) : 20 seconds
Unlock all doors when the : 25 seconds
Central door locking system ignition mode is LOCK
: Unlock all doors by turning the (OFF) Lighting time of the To home function
key, pushing the keyless entry (if equipped)
system transmitter, keyless Door locking and unlocking : Disable the To home func-
push start system remote con- siren (if equipped) tion
troller or request switch once : Siren sounds when the : 10 seconds (default setting)
: Unlock all doors by turning the door(s) is (are) locked or : 15 seconds
key, pushing the keyless entry unlocked by using the key- : 20 seconds
system transmitter, keyless less entry system transmitter, : 25 seconds
push start system remote con- keyless push start system : 30 seconds
troller or request switch twice remote controller or request
(default setting) switch (default setting)

2-63

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Shock sensor Warning and indicator lights force control function (proportioning valve
: Enable the shock sensor function) of the ABS system fails.
: Disable the shock sensor Brake system warning light If the brake system warning light comes on
(default setting)
while you are driving the vehicle, it may
mean that there is something wrong with
Pre-warning sensitivity of
the vehicles brake system.
the shock sensor
If this happens:
: Disable the pre-warning
to : 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
Adjust the pre-warning sensi-
tivity of shock sensor (Lowest 82K170 WARNING
sensitivity level is L01 and
highest is L15, and default Three different types of operations exist Remember that stopping distance
setting is L14) depending on the vehicles specification. may be longer, you may have to push
harder on the pedal, and the pedal
The light comes on briefly when the igni- may go down farther than normal.
Full blast warning sensitivity tion switch is turned to ON position or
of the shock sensor the engine switch is pressed to change
: Disable the full blast warning the ignition mode to ON. 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and
to : The light comes on when the parking stopping the vehicle on the shoulder of
Adjust the full blast warning brake is engaged with the ignition switch the road.
sensitivity of shock sensor in ON position or the ignition mode is 3) If you determine that it is safe, drive the
(Lowest sensitivity level is L01 ON. vehicle cautiously at low speed to the
and highest is L15, and The light comes on under either or both nearest an authorised Maruti Suzuki
default setting is L09) of above two conditions. workshop for repairs or tow the vehicle
to the nearest an authorised Maruti
Initialization setting The light also comes on when the fluid in Suzuki workshop for repairs.
: Initialize all settings the brake fluid reservoir falls below the
specified level.
How to exit the setting mode: The light should go out after starting the
Switch the display to show and then engine and fully releasing the parking
push the indicator selector knob (2). brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir is adequate.
The light also comes on together with the
ABS warning light when the rear brake

2-64

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warn- the rear brake force control function and
WARNING ing light the anti-lock function of the ABS system.
If any of the following conditions If one of the above occurs, have the sys-
occur, you should immediately ask tem inspected by an authorised Maruti
an authorised Maruti Suzuki work- Suzuki workshop.
shop to inspect the brake system. If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake
If the brake system warning light system will function as an ordinary brake
does not go out after the engine system that does not have this ABS sys-
has been started and the parking tem.
brake has been fully released. 65D529
For details of ABS system, refer to Anti-
If the brake system warning light When the ignition switch is turned to ON lock brake system (ABS) in OPERATING
does not come on when the igni- position or the engine switch is pressed to YOUR VEHICLE section.
tion switch is turned to ON posi- change the ignition mode to ON, this light
tion or the engine switch is pressed comes on briefly so you can check that the
to change the ignition mode to Oil pressure light
light is working.
ON. If the light stays on or comes on when driv-
If the brake system warning light ing, there may be something wrong with
comes on at any time during vehi- the ABS.
cle operation.
If this happens:
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK or
Because the brake system is self-adjust-
change the ignition mode to LOCK 50G051
ing, the fluid level will drop as the brake
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch
pads become worn. Replenishing the When the ignition switch is turned to ON
and then start the engine again.
brake fluid reservoir is considered normal position or the engine switch is pressed to
periodic maintenance. If the warning light comes on briefly and change the ignition mode to ON, this light
then turns off, the system is normal. If the comes on. When the engine is started, the
NOTE: warning light still stays on, something is light goes out. The light will come on and
Parking brake reminder buzzer wrong with the system. remain on if there is insufficient oil pres-
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind sure. If the light comes on when driving,
you to release the parking brake if you If the light and the brake system warning pull off the road as soon as you can and
start the vehicle without releasing the park- light stay on or come on simultaneously stop the engine.
ing brake. Check that the parking brake is when driving, your ABS system is Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
fully released and the brake system warn- equipped with the rear brake force control If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys-
ing light turns off. function (proportioning valve function) and tem should be inspected by an authorised
there may be something wrong with both

2-65

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Maruti Suzuki workshop before you drive Drivers seat belt reminder light AIR BAG light
the vehicle again.

NOTICE
If you operate the engine with this
light on, severe engine damage can
result.
Do not rely on the oil pressure light
to indicate the need to add oil. Peri- 60G049 63J030

odically check the engine oil level. When the driver does not buckle his or her When the ignition switch is turned to ON
seat belt, this light will come on and/or position or the engine switch is pressed to
Charging light blink. change the ignition mode to ON, this light
For details of the seat belt reminder, refer blinks or comes on for several seconds so
to Seat belts and child restraint systems you can check that the light is working.
in this section.
The light will come on and stay on if there
is a problem in the air bag system or the
seat belt pretensioner system.

WARNING
50G052
If AIR BAG light does not blink or
When the ignition switch is turned to ON come on briefly when the ignition
position or the engine switch is pressed to switch is turned to ON position or
change the ignition mode to ON, this light the engine switch is pressed to
comes on. When the engine is started, the change the ignition mode to ON,
light goes out. The light will come on and stays on for more than 10 seconds,
remain on if there is something wrong with or comes on while driving, the air bag
the battery charging system. If the light system or the seat belt pretensioner
comes on when the engine is running, the system may not work properly, which
charging system should be inspected could result in serious injury in the
immediately by an authorised Maruti event of a crash. Have both systems
Suzuki workshop. inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

2-66

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Malfunction indicator light Immobilizer/keyless push start sys-


NOTICE tem warning light
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
the malfunction indicator light is on
or blinking can cause permanent
damage to the vehicles emission
control system, and can affect fuel
economy and driveability.
65D530

Your vehicle has a computer-controlled 80JM122


Transaxle warning light
emission control system. A malfunction (if equipped) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
indicator light is provided on the instrument position or the engine switch is pressed to
cluster to indicate when it is necessary to change the ignition mode to ON, this light
have the emission control system serviced. comes on briefly so you can check that the
When the ignition switch is turned to ON light is working. If this light stays on or
position or the engine switch is pressed to blinks, there is a problem with the system.
change the ignition mode to ON, this light
comes on. When the engine is started, the If this light still stays on even if you start
light goes out. 80J219
the engine with normal voltage of the vehi-
If the malfunction indicator light comes on cle battery, ask an authorised Maruti
When the ignition switch is turned to ON Suzuki workshop to have the system
or blinks when the engine is running, there position or the engine switch is pressed to
is a damage in the emission control sys- inspected.
change the ignition mode to ON, this light
tem. comes on for several seconds so you can
Bring the vehicle to an authorised Maruti check that the light is working.
Suzuki workshop to have the damage If this light comes on when the engine is
fixed. running, there is a problem with the Auto
Also, if this light comes on when the Gear Shift system. Ask an authorised
engine is running, there is a problem with Maruti Suzuki workshop to have the sys-
the Auto Gear Shift system. Ask an autho- tem inspected.
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop to have the
system inspected. NOTE:
If the Auto Gear Shift clutch temperature
becomes too high, this light will blink. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place and let the sys-
tem cool down.

2-67

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Open door warning light NOTE: The steering wheel is kept in a fully
The activation point of this light varies turned position for a long while.
depending on road conditions (for exam- When the power steering control system
ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions cools down, the power steering system will
because of fuel movement in the tank. return to its original condition.
However, repeating these operations could
Electric power steering light cause damage to the power steering sys-
tem.
54G391
NOTE:
This light remains on until all doors are If the power steering system does not work
completely closed. properly, it will require greater effort to
If any door is open when the vehicle is steer, but you still will be able to steer.
moving, a ding sounds to remind you to
close all doors completely. 79J039 NOTE:
If the steering is operated, you may hear
When the ignition switch is turned to ON noise caused by electric power steering
Low fuel warning light position or the engine switch is pressed to operation. This is normal and indicates that
change the ignition mode to ON, this light the power steering system works properly.
comes on. When the engine is started, the
light goes out. Engine coolant temperature warn-
If this light comes on while driving, the ing light
power steering system may not work prop-
erly. Have the system inspected by an
54G343 authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
If this light comes on, refuel the fuel tank NOTE:
as soon as possible. The following steering wheel operations
When this light comes on, a ding sounds may gradually take more effort while park-
once to remind you to refuel. ing or driving at a very low speed. This is 54G344
If you do not refuel, a ding sounds every not a malfunction of the steering system,
but the power steering control system lim- When the ignition switch is turned to ON
time when the ignition switch is turned to position or the engine switch is pressed to
ON position or the engine switch is its the power assist in order to prevent it
from overheating. change the ignition mode to ON, this light
pressed to change the ignition mode to comes on briefly so you can check that the
ON. The steering wheel is operated very
often. light is working.

2-68

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

This indicator has the following two follow- Turn signal indicators Illumination indicator light
ing functions.

Low engine coolant temperature light


(blue color) - For petrol engine model
This light stays on while the engine is still
cold and goes off when the engine has
warmed up.
If this light blinks, there is a problem with 50G055 64J045
the system. Have your vehicle inspected
by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. When you turn on the left or right turn sig- This indicator light comes on while the
nals, the corresponding green arrow on the position lights, tail light and/or the head-
High engine coolant temperature warn- instrument cluster will flash along with the lights are on.
ing light (red color) respective turn signal lights. When you
If this light blinks while driving, it means the turn on the hazard warning switch, both Front fog light indicator light
engine is running hot. Avoid driving condi- arrows will flash along with all of the turn (if equipped)
tions that may lead to actual overheating. If signal lights.
the light stays on without blinking, then the
engine is overheating. Follow the instruc- Main beam (high beam) indicator
tions in Engine trouble: Overheating of light
EMERGENCY SERVICE section.

NOTICE
68PM00268
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can The front fog light indicator light comes on
result in severe engine damage. when the front fog light operates.
50G056

This indicator comes on when headlight


main beams (high beams) are turned on.

2-69

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Glow plug indicator light Drain water as soon as possible. Have ACC indicator light (if equipped)
(for diesel engine model) your vehicle inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.

Steering lock indicator light


(if equipped)

82K097
60A543 This light comes on when the ignition
If the coolant temperature is cool enough, mode is ACC.
this light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to ON position or the Ignition ON indicator light
56RH00247
engine switch is pressed to change the (if equipped)
ignition mode to ON and goes out when If this light comes on, the steering lock is
the glow plug is heated enough for engine not disengaged. While lightly turning the
starting. steering wheel in both directions, press the
engine switch again.
Fuel filter warning light
(for diesel engine model) PUSH indicator light
(if equipped)
82K098

This light comes on when the ignition


mode is ON with the engine off.

60A541
82K174
This light comes on for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to ON If this light comes on when depressing the
position or the engine switch is pressed to brake pedal for Auto Gear Shift vehicles, or
change the ignition mode to ON so you the clutch pedal for manual transaxle vehi-
can check that light is working. cles, you can start the engine.
If the light comes on when driving, there is
a possibility to have water in the fuel filter.

2-70

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Depress brake pedal indicator Lighting control lever Lighting operation


(if equipped)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(3)

76MH0A047

Refer to Auto Gear Shift in the OPERAT- (2)


ING YOUR VEHICLE section for details.
(1)

56RH00248
65D611
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob
on the end of the lever. There are three
WARNING positions:
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the OFF (1)
steering wheel. All lights are off.

(2)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.

(3)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light, instrument lights and headlights
are on.

2-71

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Automatic light operation To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob
EXAMPLE (if equipped) on the end of the lever. There are four
positions:
EXAMPLE
OFF (1)
All lights are off.
(4)
(3)
AUTO (2)
This function works when or the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to ON. The headlights and position
lights are turned on and off automatically
(2) according to the amount of outside light
(1) detected by a sensor. They go out auto-
56RH00249 matically when you change the ignition
With the headlights on, push the lever for- mode to ACC or LOCK (OFF) by press-
ward to switch to the high beams (main 56RH00250 ing the engine switch.
beams) or pull the lever toward you to The light sensor (5) for sensing the amount
switch to the low beams. When the high EXAMPLE of outside light is installed on the passen-
beams (main beams) are on, a light on the gers seat side instrument panel.
instrument cluster will come on. To
momentarily activate the high beams (main
beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever CAUTION
slightly toward you and release it when you (5)
If the light sensor area of the wind-
have completed the signal. shield is covered with mud, ice, or
other similar substances, the head-
NOTICE lights and position lights may be
Do not leave the headlamp ON in any turned on even when it is still light
position when the engine is not run- outside.
ning, or the battery will discharge
rapidly.
56RH00251

2-72

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Auto-on headlight system


Avoid covering the light sensor area of EXAMPLE
the windshield with a sticker. The sticker EXAMPLE
may impair the performance of the sen-
sor and make the system unable to con-
trol operation of the lights correctly.
If you changed the ignition mode to ON (5)
by pressing the engine switch and
AUTO position remains selected, the
headlights and position lights come on
automatically as it gets dark outside,
even with the engine not running. Leav-
ing the lights lit for a long time may lead
to a completely discharged battery.
56RH00252
56RH00251
(3) With the headlights on, push the lever for-
Front position lights, tail lights, license The auto-on headlight system automati-
ward to switch to the high beams (main cally turns on all lights that are operated by
plate light and instrument lights are on, but beams) or pull the lever toward you to
headlights are off. the lighting control lever on the steering
switch to the low beams. When the high column, when the following three condi-
(4) beams (main beams) are on, a light on the tions are all met.
Front position lights, tail lights, license instrument cluster will come on. To
plate light, instrument lights and headlights momentarily activate the high beams (main Conditions for auto-on headlight system
are on. beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever operation:
slightly toward you and release it when you 1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).
have completed the signal. 2) The lighting control lever is in AUTO
position.
NOTICE 3) You press the engine switch to change
the ignition mode to ON.
Do not leave the headlamp ON in any
position when the engine is not run- This system is activated by a signal from
ning, or the battery will discharge the light sensor (5) on the passenger side
rapidly. of Instrument panel. Do not cover the sen-
sor (5). Otherwise, the system will not work
correctly.

2-73

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Your vehicles lighting system is controlled


by two main systems: the lighting switch
and the auto-on headlight system (when
the lighting switch is in AUTO position).
The two systems work together to operate
your lights as shown in the following chart:

2-74

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

ON: Lights ON
LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5). WARNING
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).
It takes about 5 seconds for the light
Ignition mode sensor to react to a change in light-
Lighting Main lights to be LOCK (OFF) or Ignition mode ON ing conditions. To help avoid an acci-
switch posi- operated ACC dent due to reduced visibility, turn on
tion your headlights before driving into a
LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK
tunnel, parking structure, etc.
Position lights,
(1) OFF Tail lights NOTE:
Headlights The light sensor reacts even to infrared
Position lights, rays, so it may operate incorrectly when
ON there are strong infrared rays.
(2) AUTO Tail lights
Headlights ON Light reminder buzzer
Position lights, ON ON ON ON The interior buzzer continuously beeps if
(3) Tail lights you open the drivers door without turning
Headlights off the headlights and position lights. This
function is triggered under the following
Position lights, condition:
Tail lights ON ON ON ON
(4) The headlights and/or position lights are
Headlights ON ON ON ON on even after the ignition switch is turned
off, or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to LOCK
(OFF).
The buzzer stops sounding when you turn
off the headlights and position lights.

2-75

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Daytime running light (D.R.L.) sys- 3) Pull the lighting control lever toward To cancel the function:
tem (if equipped) you once and open the drivers side Perform any of the following operations.
When the engine is started, the daytime door within 60 seconds. Or pull the Lock the doors by using the keyless
running lights are turned on by this system. lighting control lever toward you once push start system remote controller or
while the drivers side door is open. the request switch, or the key in the
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation drivers door lock.
1) The engine is running. To cancel the function: Change the ignition mode to ACC or
2) Headlights and front fog light (if Perform any of the following operations. ON by pressing the engine switch.
equipped) are off. Pull the lighting control lever toward you Turn the lighting switch to any other
once. position than AUTO position.
NOTE: Change the ignition mode to ACC or
Brightness of the daytime running lights is ON by pressing the engine switch. NOTE:
different from the brightness of the position Turn the lighting switch to any other When the To car is functioning, the
lights, but it is not a malfunction. position than AUTO position. front fog lights and the headlights (high
beam) are not turned on.
Guide me light (vehicle with auto- NOTE: Lighting time of the To car function can
matic lights operation) When the To home is functioning, the be changed on the information display.
Guide me light has two functions of To front fog lights and the headlights (high Refer to Information display in this sec-
home and To car for improving your visi- beam) are not turned on. tion.
bility in the dark. Lighting time of the To home function
can be changed on the information dis-
To home function play. Refer to Information display in this
Even after you leave the car, the ground section.
will be illuminated for a short while with this
function. You can turn on the front position To car function
lights and the headlights in the low beam Before you get in the vehicle, the ground
setting for about 10 seconds after the will be illuminated for a short while to easily
engine switch is pressed to change the lead the driver to the vehicle. If UNLOCK
ignition mode to LOCK (OFF). button of the keyless push start system
remote controller is pressed while the light-
To set the function: ing switch is positioned in AUTO, the
1) Turn the lighting switch to AUTO posi- front position lights and the headlights in
tion. the low beam are turned on for 10 sec-
2) Press the engine switch to change the onds.
ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).

2-76

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Front fog light switch Headlight leveling switch Vehicle with the halogen headlights
(if equipped) Switch
Vehicle Load Condition
EXAMPLE Position
EXAMPLE
Driver only 0
Driver + 1 passenger
0
(in front seat)
Driver + 4 passengers,
1.5
no cargo
Driver + 4 passengers,
2.5
cargo added
Driver + full cargo 4
75RM008
56RH00253 Vehicle with the LED headlights
Level the headlight beam according to the Switch
To turn the front fog light on, twist the knob load condition of your vehicle by turning Vehicle Load Condition
as shown in the illustration with the posi- Position
this switch. The chart shows the appropri-
tion lights, tail lights and/or the headlights ate switch position for different vehicle load Driver only 0
are on. When the front fog light is on, an conditions.
indicator light on the instrument cluster will Driver + 1 passenger
come on. 0
(in front seat)

NOTE: Driver + 4 passengers,


2
In some countries the lighting operation no cargo
may be different from the above descrip- Driver + 4 passengers,
tion according to local regulations. 2.5
cargo added
Driver + full cargo 4

2-77

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Turn signal control lever Normal turn signal Move the lever partially upward or down-
ward to turn right or left and hold the lever
in the moved position.
EXAMPLE The turn signal and its indicator flash
while the lever is held at the moved posi-
tion.
The turn signal and its indicator flash 3
times even if you returned the lever imme-
diately after the activation.

NOTE:
The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash 3 times after the turn
EXAMPLE signal lever is returned via the information
56RH00255
display. Refer to Information display in
65D611
this section.
Move the lever all the way upward or
downward to signal. When the turn is com- NOTE:
WARNING pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever You can customize the setting for the num-
will return to its normal position. ber of flashing times of the turn signal and
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please ask an
Lane change signal authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for the
steering wheel.
customization.
Turn signal operation
With the ignition switch in ON position or
the ignition mode ON, move the lever
upward or downward to activate the right
or left turn signals.

EXAMPLE
56RH00256

2-78

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Hazard warning switch Windshield wiper and washer Wiper and washer operation
When the ignition switch is in ON position
lever or the ignition mode is ON, you can use
EXAMPLE the wiper/washer lever.
EXAMPLE
Windshield wipers

56RH00257
57L21128
Push the hazard warning switch to activate
the hazard warning lights. All turn signal
lights and both turn signal indicators will WARNING EXAMPLE
flash simultaneously. To turn off the lights, 56RH00258
push the switch again. To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the To turn the windshield wipers on, move the
Use the hazard warning lights to warn lever down to one of the three operating
other drivers of possible risk of traffic haz- steering wheel.
positions. In INT position, the wipers
ard when you park your vehicle in case of operate intermittently. The INT position is
emergency. very convenient for driving in mist or light
rain. In LO position, the wipers operate at
a steady low speed. In HI position, the
wipers operate at a steady high speed. To
turn off the wipers, move the lever back to
OFF position.
Move the lever up and hold it to MIST
position, the windshield wipers will turn on
continuously at low speed.

2-79

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Windshield washer Tilt steering lock lever


NOTICE
EXAMPLE To help prevent damage to the wind- EXAMPLE
shield wiper and washer system
components, you should take the fol-
lowing precautions:
Do not continue to hold in the lever
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the (1)
washer motor can be damaged.
Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or
you can damage the windshield (2)
and the wiper blades. Always wet
56RH00259
the windshield with washer fluid 56RH00260
before operating the wipers. (1) LOCK
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the Clear ice or packed snow from the
lever toward you. The windshield wipers (2) UNLOCK
wiper blades before using the wip-
will automatically turn on at low speed if ers.
they are not already on and your vehicle is The lock lever is located under the steering
Check the washer fluid level regu- column. To adjust the steering wheel
equipped with INT position. larly. Check it often when the height:
weather is bad.
WARNING Fill a reservoir to 3/4 level with 1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the
To prevent windshield icing in cold washer fluid for its expansion, if steering column.
weather, turn on the defroster to temperature falls low enough to 2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
heat the windshield before and freeze the fluid. height and lock the steering column by
during windshield washer use. pulling up the lock lever.
Do not use radiator antifreeze in 3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
the windshield washer reservoir. It down to check that it is securely locked
can severely impair visibility when in position.
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicles paint. WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while the vehicle is moving or
you could lose control of the vehicle.

2-80

56RH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Horn Heated rear window switch When the rear window is misted, push this
switch (1) to clear the window.
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE An indicator light will come on when the
Type A defogger is on. The defogger will work only
EXAMPLE when the engine is running. To turn off the
defogger, push the switch (1) again.

NOTICE
The heated rear window use a large
amount of electricity. Turn off the
switch after the window and mirrors
have become clear.

NOTE:
(1) The defogger will work only when the
56RH00261
engine is running.
Press the horn button of the steering wheel The defogger will automatically turn off
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with 56RH00262
after the defogger remains on for 15 min-
the ignition switch in any position or any utes to prevent discharging of the bat-
Type B
ignition mode. tery.
EXAMPLE

(1)

56RH00273

2-81

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE


Exhaust gas warning .......................................................... 3-1
Daily inspection checklist .................................................. 3-1
Engine oil consumption ..................................................... 3-2
Ignition switch 3
(vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-3
Engine switch
(vehicle with keyless push start system) .......................... 3-5
Keyless push start system (if equipped) .......................... 3-6
Parking brake lever ............................................................. 3-9
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-10
Starting engine
(vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-11
Starting engine
(vehicle with keyless push start system) .......................... 3-12
Using transaxle ................................................................... 3-16
Gearshift Indicator (if equipped) ........................................ 3-25
60G408
Parking sensors (if equipped) ............................................ 3-27
Rearview camera (if equipped) .......................................... 3-32
Braking ................................................................................. 3-34

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust gas warning Daily inspection checklist


WARNING
EXAMPLE (Continued)
Before driving
Do not park with the engine run-
ning for a long period of time, even EXAMPLE
in an open area. If it is necessary to
sit for a short time in a parked vehi-
cle with the engine running, make
sure that the air intake selector is
set to FRESH AIR and the blower
is at high speed.
Avoid operating the vehicle with
the tailgate or trunk open. If it is
necessary to do so, make sure that
the sunroof (if equipped) and all
52D334 windows are closed, and the
blower is at high speed with the air 60A187S
WARNING intake selector set to FRESH AIR.
To allow proper operation of your 1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights
Avoid breathing exhaust gases. vehicles ventilation system, keep and reflectors are clean and unob-
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- the air inlet grill in front of the wind- structed.
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is shield clear of snow, leaves or 2) Visually check the tires for the following
colorless and odorless. Since carbon other obstructions at all times. points:
monoxide is difficult to detect by Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear the depth of the tread groove
itself, take the following precautions of snow and other material to help abnormal wear, cracks and damage
to help prevent carbon monoxide reduce the buildup of exhaust loose wheel nuts
from entering your vehicle. gases under the vehicle. This is existence of foreign material such as
Do not leave the engine running in particularly important when parked nails, stones, etc.
garages or other confined areas. in blizzard conditions. Refer to Tires in INSPECTION AND
(Continued) Have the exhaust system inspected MAINTENANCE section for details.
periodically for damage and leak- 3) Look for fluid and oil leakage.
age. Any damage or leakage
should be repaired immediately.

3-1

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: 6) Hood latch operation Engine oil consumption


It is normal for water to drip from the air Pull the hood release handle inside the
It is normal for the engine to consume
conditioning system while and after use. vehicle. Check that you cannot open
some engine oil during normal vehicle
the hood further without releasing the
operation.
4) Check that the hood is fully closed and secondary latch. Close the hood
latched. securely after checking for proper latch The amount of engine oil consumption
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, operation. See the item All latches, depends on viscosity and quality of the oil
brake lights and horn for proper opera- hinges and locks of Chassis, body and your driving conditions.
tion. and others in Maintenance schedule More oil is consumed during high-speed
6) Adjust the seat and head restraint (if in INSPECTION AND MAINTE- driving and when there is frequent acceler-
equipped). NANCE section for lubrication sched- ation and deceleration. Under high loads,
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking ule. your engine also will consume more oil.
brake lever. A new engine also consumes more oil,
8) Adjust the mirrors. WARNING since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
9) Check that you and all passengers walls have not yet become conditioned.
have properly fastened by the seat Make sure that the hood is fully New engines reach the normal level of oil
belts. closed and latched before driving. If consumption only after approximately
10)Check that all warning lights come on it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly 5000 km driving.
as the ignition switch is turned to ON during driving, obstructing your view
position or the engine switch is pressed and resulting in an accident. Oil consumption:
to change the ignition mode to ON. Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km
11)Check all gauges. Once a month, or each time you fill your
12)Check that the brake system warning fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a When judging the amount of oil consump-
light turns off when the parking brake is tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire tion, note that the oil may become diluted
released. pressure of the spare tire. and it is difficult to judge the accurate oil
level.
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel As an example, if a vehicle is used for
tank, perform the following under-hood repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
checks: mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
1) Engine oil level after 1000 km or more of driving. This is
2) Coolant level because the oil gradually becomes diluted
3) Brake fluid level with fuel or moisture, making it appear that
4) Battery solution level the oil level has not changed.
5) Windshield washer fluid level You should also be aware that the diluting
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle

3-2

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

is subsequently driven at high speeds, Ignition switch


such as on an expressway, making it EXAMPLE
appear that oil is excessively consumed (vehicle without keyless push
after high-speed driving. start system)
EXAMPLE

68PH00310

The ignition switch has the following four


positions:

LOCK
65D611
This is the normal parking position. It is the
only position in which the key can be
WARNING removed.
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the
EXAMPLE Turn to LOCK

steering wheel.

Push

60G033

3-3

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

You must push in the key to turn it to


LOCK position. It locks the ignition, and EXAMPLE
prevents normal use of the steering wheel WARNING
after the key is removed. (Continued)
To release the steering lock, insert the key Always return the ignition switch to
and turn it clockwise to one of the other LOCK position and remove the
positions. If you have trouble turning the ignition key when leaving the vehi-
key to unlock the steering wheel, try turn- cle even only for a short time. Also
ing the steering wheel slightly to the right do not leave children alone in a
or left while turning the key. parked vehicle. Unattended chil-
dren could cause accidental move-
ACC ment of the vehicle or could tamper
Accessories such as the radio can oper- with power windows or power sun-
ate, but the engine is off.
81A297S roof. They also could suffer from
heat stroke in warm or hot weather.
WARNING These could result in severe injury
ON
This is the normal operating position. All Never return the ignition switch to or even death.
electrical systems are on. LOCK position and remove the
ignition key while the vehicle is
moving. The steering wheel will NOTICE
START
This is the position for starting the engine lock and you will not be able to Do not use the starter motor for
using the starter motor. The key should be steer the vehicle. more than 12 seconds at a time. If
released from this position as soon as the Always return the ignition switch to the engine does not start, wait 15
engine starts. LOCK position and remove the seconds before trying again. If the
ignition key when leaving the vehi- engine does not start after several
Ignition key reminder cle even only for a short time. Also attempts, make sure the fuel and
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind do not leave children alone in a ignition systems or consult an
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the parked vehicle. Unattended chil- authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
ignition switch when the drivers door is dren could cause accidental move- shop.
opened. ment of the vehicle or could tamper Do not leave the ignition switch in
with power windows or power sun- ON position if the engine is not
roof. They also could suffer from running as the battery will dis-
heat stroke in warm or hot weather. charge.
These could result in severe injury
or even death.
(Continued)

3-4

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine switch ON NOTE:


With the engine off You do not need to keep the engine switch
(vehicle with keyless push You can use such electric equipment as pressed to until the engine start.
start system) the power windows and wipers with the
engine off. When this ignition mode is NOTICE
selected by pressing the engine switch,
EXAMPLE the ignition ON indicator light in the Do not leave the engine switch in
instrument cluster will come on. ACC or ON mode when the
engine is not running. Avoid using
With the engine on the radio or other electric accesso-
All electric equipment is operational. The ries for a long time when the engine
vehicle can be driven when you have switch is in ACC or ON mode
selected this ignition mode by pressing when the engine is not running, oth-
the engine switch. erwise the battery may discharge.

START NOTE:
Manual transaxle Provided you have the The steering lock may not be released
keyless push start system remote control- and the steering lock indicator light turns
56RH00301 ler with you, the engine automatically on if some load is acting on the steering
starts when you press the engine switch to wheel. If this happens, turn the steering
LOCK (OFF) select this ignition mode after shifting to
This mode is for parking the vehicle. When wheel to the right or left to relieve it from
N (Neutral) and depressing the brake and the load before you press the engine
this mode is selected by pressing the clutch pedals.
engine switch and then any door is opened switch again to change to the desired
or closed, the steering will be locked auto- ignition mode.
Auto Gear Shift Provided you have the In the presence of strong radio wave or
matically. keyless push start system remote control- noise, you may not be able to change
ler with you, the engine automatically the ignition mode to ACC or ON or to
ACC starts when you press the engine switch to
Press the engine switch to select this igni- start the engine using the engine switch.
select this ignition mode after placing the
tion mode to use such electric equipment gearshift lever in N (Neutral) position and
as the audio system, outside rearview mir- depressing the brake pedal.
rors and accessory socket with the engine
off. When this position is selected, the
ACC indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter comes on. Refer to Warning and indi-
cator lights in BEFORE DRIVING
section for details.

3-5

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless push start system illumination will go out when the position Selection of ignition modes
lights and/or the headlights are turned Press the engine switch to select ACC or
(if equipped) off. ON mode as follows when you use an
Provided the keyless push start system electric accessory or check the operation
remote controller is within the interior work- EXAMPLE of instruments without running the engine.
able area (refer to the related explanation
in this section), you can use the engine 1) Bring the keyless push start system
switch for starting the engine and selecting remote controller with you and sit in the
an ignition mode (ACC or ON). In addi- drivers seat.
tion, the following functions can be used: 2) Manual transaxle Without depressing
Keyless entry function. Refer to Keyless the clutch pedal, press the engine
push start system remote controller / switch (1).
keyless entry system transmitter (if
equipped) in BEFORE DRIVING sec-
82K253 Auto Gear Shift Without depressing
tion for details. NOTE: the brake pedal, press the engine
Locking and unlocking doors using a To save the battery, the illumination will be switch (1).
request switch. Refer to Keyless push automatically turned off when both of the
start system remote controller / keyless following conditions are simultaneously EXAMPLE
entry system transmitter (if equipped) in met:
BEFORE DRIVING section for details. The headlights and position lights are
Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to turned off.
Immobilizer system in BEFORE DRIV- 15 minutes has elapsed since opening
ING section for details. the drivers door.
Engine switch illumination
The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the
following situations: (1)
When the engine is off and the drivers
door is open, or for 15 seconds after the
drivers door is closed. The illumination
will fade out after 15 seconds passed. 82K254
When the engine is off and the position Every time you press the engine switch,
lights are on. The illumination will go out the ignition mode changes as follows.
when the position lights are turned off.
When the engine is on and the position
lights and/or the headlights are on. The

3-6

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

1) Manual transaxle Without depressing few seconds when you press the engine
the clutch pedal, push the engine switch to change the ignition mode to
switch (1). ON. Refer to Warning and indicator
Auto Gear Shift Without depressing lights in BEFORE DRIVING section for
the brake pedal, press the engine details. For details on replacing the bat-
switch (1). tery, refer to Keyless push start system
(Audio equipment) 2) Within about 10 seconds during which remote controller / keyless entry system
(OFF)
the PUSH indicator light in the instru- transmitter (if equipped) in BEFORE
EXAMPLE ment cluster is blinking, touch the DRIVING section.
engine switch with the lock switch end
68PH00322
of the remote controller (2) for about 2 REMOTE CONTROLLER OUTSIDE
If the PUSH indicator light blinks and seconds. warning
the ignition modes cannot be selected When either of the conditions described
Your keyless push start system remote con- NOTE:
If you still cannot select the ignition below is met, the system causes a
troller may not be sensed as being within the REMOTE CONTROLLER OUTSIDE warn-
interior workable area (refer to the related modes, there may be some problem with
the keyless push start system. Contact ing by sounding the interior and exterior
explanation in this section). Try again after buzzers. At the same time, the immobi-
checking that you have the remote controller an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
for an inspection of the system. lizer/keyless push start system warning
with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be light comes on.
selected, the battery of the remote controller The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
may be discharged. To select an ignition tem warning light will come on for about Any door is opened and then closed
mode, you must then use the following 5 seconds while the PUSH indicator while the remote controller is not inside
method: light is blinking. Refer to Warning and the vehicle and the engine is running or
indicator lights in BEFORE DRIVING the ignition mode has been changed to
EXAMPLE section for details. ACC or ON by pressing the engine
You may customize the system to cause switch.
(1)
the interior buzzer to sound once for The remote controller is not inside the
warning that remote controller is out of vehicle when you attempt to start the
sensing range. To incorporate this cus- engine after changing the ignition mode
tomization, please contact an authorised to ACC or ON by pressing the engine
Maruti Suzuki workshop. switch.
If the battery of the remote controller is
becoming discharged, the keyless push
(2) start system remote controller battery
consumption warning indicator in the
56RH00302 information display will come on for a

3-7

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

engine (vehicle with keyless push start The remote controllers battery is low.
system) (if equipped) in this section. The remote controller is affected by
(1) Always keep the remote controller with strong radio wave or noise.
you as the driver. The remote controller is in contact with
or covered by a metallic object.
Interior workable area for keyless The remote controller is in the secluded
push start system stowage such as the glove box or a
door pocket.
EXAMPLE The remote controller is in the sun visor
pocket or on the floor.
Even when the remote controller is out-
side the interior workable area, if it is in
any of the following conditions, you may
EXAMPLE be able to start the engine or select the
56RH00303 ignition mode. The REMOTE CON-
(1) Immobilizer/keyless push start sys- TROLLER OUTSIDE warning may not
tem warning light (blinks) be given at that time.
The remote controller is outside the
NOTE: (1) vehicle but very close to a door.
If the warning is given, relocate the The remote controller is in certain area
remote controller as soon as possible. on the instrument panel.
Any attempt to start the engine will fail 57L31004
while the warning is active. Blinking of (1) Interior workable area
the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
tem warning light in the instrument clus- The interior workable area is defined as all
ter will also indicate this condition. Refer the interior spaces except for the space
to Warning and indicator lights in above the instrument panel.
BEFORE DRIVING section for details.
Normally, the immobilizer/keyless push NOTE:
start system warning light should go out Even when the remote controller is in the
shortly after the remote controller is interior workable area, if it is in any of the
brought back inside the vehicle. If they following conditions, you may not be
remain lit and blinking, change the ignition able to start the engine or select the igni-
mode to LOCK (OFF) by pressing the tion modes, and the REMOTE CON-
engine switch and then perform the engine TROLLER OUTSIDE warning may be
starting operation. Refer to Starting given.

3-8

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Parking brake lever


WARNING WARNING
EXAMPLE Never drive your vehicle with the When parking the vehicle in
parking brake on: rear brake effec- extremely cold weather, the following
(1) tiveness can be reduced from over- procedure should be used:
heating, brake life may be 1) Set the parking brake.
shortened, or permanent brake 2) Manual transaxle turn off the
(2) damage may result. engine, then shift into reverse or
If the parking brake does not hold first gear.
the vehicle securely or does not Auto Gear Shift shift into reverse
(3) fully release, have your vehicle or first gear and check the gear
inspected immediately by an autho- position indicator in the instru-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop. ment cluster to make sure that the
transaxle is engaged in 1st or
reverse, then turn off the engine.
68PHM3001 WARNING 3) Get out of the vehicle and put
(1) To set Always set the parking brake fully chocks under the wheels.
(2) To release before leaving your vehicle or it may 4) Release the parking brake.
(3) To release move, causing injury or damage. When you return to your vehicle,
When parking, check that the gear- first set the parking brake, and
The parking brake lever is located between shift lever is in one of the following then remove the wheel chocks.
the front seats. To set the parking brake, positions;
depress the brake pedal down and pull the 1st gear or R (Reverse) for man- NOTE:
parking brake lever all the way up. To ual transaxle vehicles. (For Auto Gear Shift Model) For details on
release the parking brake, depress the D, M or R for Auto Gear Shift how to use the gearshift lever to park the
brake pedal and, pull up slightly on the vehicles. Also, make sure the vehicle, refer to Parking in Auto Gear
parking brake lever, push the button on the instrument cluster to make sure Shift in this section.
end of the lever with your thumb, and lower that the transaxle is engaged in 1
the lever to its original position. or R position. Parking brake reminder buzzer
Remember, even though the A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
transaxle is in gear, you must set the you to release the parking brake if you
parking brake fully. start the vehicle without fully releasing the
parking brake. Check that the parking
brake is fully released and the brake sys-
tem warning light turns off.

3-9

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Pedal Clutch pedal (1)


A clutch pedal is used to disengage the WARNING
Manual transaxle driving force to the wheels when starting
the engine, stopping, or shifting the gear- If brake squeal is excessive and
EXAMPLE shift lever. Depressing the pedal disen- occurs each time the brakes are
gages the clutch. applied, you should have the brakes
checked by your authorised Maruti
(1) (2) Suzuki workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal. It could result in WARNING
excessive clutch wear, clutch dam- Do not apply brakes continuously or
age, or unexpected loss of engine rest your foot on the brake pedal.
(3) braking. This will result in overheating of the
brakes which could cause unpredict-
able braking action, longer stopping
NOTICE distances, or permanent brake dam-
80J2121
Do not pump the clutch pedal repeat- age.
Auto Gear Shift edly. It may result in pressure built up
EXAMPLE in the clutch circuit and damage to Accelerator pedal (3)
the clutch system. An accelerator pedal controls the speed of
the engine. Depressing the accelerator
Brake pedal (2) pedal increases power output and speed.
(2)
Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is equipped
with either disc brakes and rear drum
brakes. Depressing a brake pedal applies
both sets of brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal
(3) when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-
mal condition caused by environmental
factors such as temperature, humidity or
80J2122
dust etc.

3-10

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Starting engine NOTE: If the engine does not start after 12 sec-
For Auto Gear Shift vehicles, if the engine onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,
(vehicle without keyless push cannot be started, make sure the gearshift and then press down the accelerator pedal
start system) lever is in N before restarting the engine. to 1/3 of its stroke capacity and try crank-
ing the engine again. Release the key and
Before starting engine WARNING accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

EXAMPLE Make sure that the parking brake is If the engine still does not start, depress
set fully and the transaxle is in the accelerator pedal all the way to the
MT Neutral before attempting to start floor while cranking. This should clear the
the engine. engine if it is flooded.
For Manual Transaxle - Engine can
be started only after depressing the (For diesel engine model)
clutch pedal. However, before
depressing the clutch pedal make Cold engine
sure that the transaxle is in Neutral Turn the ignition switch to ON position
Auto Gear Shift
and brake pedal is depressed. and wait until the glow plug indicator goes
out if it comes on. Crank the engine by
Starting a cold and warm engine turning the ignition key to START.
Release the key when the engine starts.
(For petrol engine model)
With your foot taken off the accelerator NOTICE
pedal, crank the engine by turning the igni-
tion key to START. Release the key when Stop turning the starter immedi-
the engine starts. ately after the engine has started or
56RH00305 the starter system can be damaged.
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. NOTICE Do not crank the engine for more
2) Manual transaxle Shift into N (Neu- than 30 seconds at a time. If the
tral). Hold the clutch pedal and brake Stop turning the starter immedi- engine dose not start on the first
pedal fully depress. ately after the engine has started or try, wait about 15 seconds before
Auto Gear Shift Shift into N (Neutral) the starter system can be damaged. trying again.
and depress the brake pedal. Hold the Do not crank the engine for more
brake pedal while starting the engine. than 12 seconds at a time. If the
engine does not start on the first
try, wait about 15 seconds before
trying again.

3-11

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Warm engine Starting engine


Crank the engine by turning the ignition EXAMPLE
key to START. Release the key when the (vehicle with keyless push
engine starts. start system)
Caution when stopping the engine with
turbocharger Before starting engine
When stopping the engine after climbing or
high speed driving, let the engine idle for
EXAMPLE
MT
(1)
about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and 82K254
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated 3) The PUSH indicator light in the instru-
engine oil will damage the bearings of the ment cluster will come on. Push the
turbocharger. engine switch (1). When the engine is
Auto Gear Shift started, the starter motor will automati-
Restarting diesel engine after fuelempty cally stop.
stop
If the engine stops and the low fuel warn- WARNING
ing light and the malfunction indicator light Make sure that the parking brake is
come on, use the following procedure: set fully and the transaxle is in Neu-
1) Fill the fuel tank. tral before attempting to start the
2) Hold the ignition key in ON position for 56RH00306
engine.
5-10 seconds to feed fuel. 1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
3) Perform above engine starting proce- 2) Manual transaxle Shift into N (Neu-
dure to start the engine. tral) and fully depress the clutch pedal.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully
on after the engine started, there may be depressed.
some problem with the engine. Ask an Auto Gear Shift Shift into N (Neutral)
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to and depress the brake pedal. Hold the
have the engine inspected. brake pedal while starting the engine.

3-12

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Stopping engine Starting a cold and warm engine


NOTICE Depress the engine switch to stop the
(For petrol engine model)
engine after the vehicle stopped com-
Do not depress the accelerator pletely. With your foot taken off the accelerator
during the engine starting proce- In case of emergency, you can stop the pedal, crank the engine by pressing the
dure. engine by quickly pushing the engine engine switch to change the ignition mode
If the engine does not respond switch more than 3 times, or pushing to START.
when you try to start it with the and holding the engine switch for more
engine switch or if the engine than 2 seconds while the vehicle is in NOTICE
switch repeats cycling through motion.
LOCK (OFF) - ACC - ON Do not crank the engine for more
mode, the vehicle battery may be than 12 seconds at a time.
NOTE: If the engine does not start on the
discharged. Check the voltage of Except in cases of emergency, do not stop
the vehicle battery before trying first try, wait about 15 seconds before
the engine while the vehicle is in motion. trying again.
again. The steering and braking operation will
require more effort when the engine is After pressing the engine switch to change
NOTE: stopped. Refer to Braking in this section. the ignition mode to START, the starter
You do not need to keep the engine
cranks the engine for about 12 seconds
switch pressed to start the engine. If the engine remains stopped for while before it can start the engine. If the engine
The engine of a manual transaxle vehi- after it was stopped unexpectedly or was fails to start at the first attempt, wait about
cle will not start unless the clutch pedal raced before stopping, a clicking sound 15 seconds, and then try again while keep-
is depressed. may be heard from around the engine ing the engine switch pressed while press-
For Auto Gear Shift vehicles, if the when it is restarted. This is not a mal- ing down the accelerator pedal 1/3 of its
engine cannot be started, make sure the function. Always let the engine idle stroke capacity. Release the accelerator
gearshift lever is in N before restarting before stopping it. pedal when the engine starts.
the engine.
You should turn off such loads as the If the engine still does not start, try holding
headlights and air conditioning system to the accelerator pedal all the way to the
facilitate starting of the engine. floor while cranking. If you are unable to
Even if you fail to start the engine, the start the engine using this procedure, con-
starter motor will stop turning automati- sult an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
cally after a short time. After the starter
motor has stopped or if there is some
problem with the system, the starter
motor will rotate only while the engine
switch is being pressed.

3-13

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

(For diesel engine model) Restarting diesel engine after fuel


Cold engine
empty stop EXAMPLE
If the engine stops and the low fuel warn-
Depress the clutch and brake pedals fully ing light and the malfunction indicator light
and press the engine switch to crank the (1)
come on, use the following procedure:
engine. If the glow plug indicator light 1) Fill the fuel tank.
comes on, the engine will start automati- 2) Press the engine switch to change the
cally after the glow plug indicator light goes ignition mode to ON for 5-10 seconds
off or 10 seconds past. to feed fuel.
3) Perform above engine starting proce-
NOTICE dure to start the engine.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes (2)
Do not crank the engine for more
than 30 seconds at a time. on after the engine started, there may be
If the engine dose not start on the some problem with the engine. Ask an
first try, wait about 15 seconds before authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to 56RH00302
trying again. have the engine inspected. 1) Make sure that the parking brake is set
fully.
Warm engine If the PUSH indicator light blinks and 2) Manual Transaxle Shift into N (Neu-
Crank the engine by pressing the engine the engine cannot be started tral). Hold the clutch and brake pedals
switch to change the ignition mode to Your keyless push start system remote fully depressed.
START. controller may not be sensed as being Auto Gear Shift Shift into N (Neutral)
within the interior workable area. Try again and fully depress the brake pedal. Hold
Caution when stopping the engine with after checking that you have the remote the brake pedal fully depressed.
turbocharger controller with you. If the engine still can- 3) The PUSH indicator light in the instru-
When stopping the engine after climbing or not be started, the battery of the remote ment cluster will come on. Press the
high speed driving, let the engine idle for controller may be discharged. You must engine switch (1).
about one minute or more (if it is not pro- then use the following method to be able to 4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking of
hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and start the engine. the PUSH indicator light in the instru-
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil ment cluster, touch the engine switch
from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated with the lock switch end of the remote
engine oil will damage the bearings of the controller (2) for about 2 seconds.
turbocharger.

3-14

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Returning the ignition mode to NOTE:


If you still cannot start the engine after LOCK (OFF) Whenever you leave the vehicle, check
several attempts using the above that you have returned the ignition mode to
method, there may be a problem else- NOTE: LOCK (OFF) using the engine switch and
where, such as a low battery. Contact an Certain problems like a fault in engine sys- then lock the doors. Without returning the
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for tem may prevent the engine switch from ignition mode to LOCK (OFF), you can-
inspection. going back to LOCK (OFF) mode. If this not use a request switch or keyless push
The immobilizer/keyless push start sys- happens, have the vehicle inspected by an start system remote controller to lock the
tem warning light will come on for about authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop after doors.
5 seconds while the PUSH indicator doing the following:
light is blinking. Lock the doors using the key to prevent Steering lock warning buzzer
You may customize the system to cause theft. (The request switches and the key- If the steering lock fails to engage due to a
the interior buzzer to sound once for less push start system remote controller fault in the system when the ignition mode
warning that remote controller is out of cannot be used to lock them.) is turned to LOCK (OFF) by pressing the
sensing range. Please contact an autho- Disconnect the negative cable from the engine switch and then any door is opened
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop for the battery to prevent discharge. or closed, the interior buzzer will warn you
customization. of this condition with repeated short beeps.
If the battery of the remote controller is LOCK (OFF) mode reminder buzzer If this happens, have the vehicle inspected
about to become completely discharged, If the drivers door is opened without by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
the keyless push start system remote returning the ignition mode to LOCK
controller battery consumption indicator (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a
in the information display will come on buzzer sounds to warn you of this condi-
for a few seconds when the ignition tion.
mode is changed to ON by pressing If you open the drivers door after press-
the engine switch. For details on replac- ing the engine switch to change the igni-
ing the battery, refer to Keyless push tion mode to ACC, the interior buzzer
start system remote controller / keyless beeps intermittently.
entry system transmitter (if equipped) in The buzzer will stop sounding if you then
BEFORE DRIVING section. push the engine switch twice, thus bring-
ing it back the ignition mode to LOCK
(OFF).

3-15

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Using the transaxle Downshifting maximum allowable


speeds WARNING
Manual transaxle Reduce your speed and downshift
For K12M engine models
to a lower gear before going down
Downshifting km/h a long or steep hill. A lower gear
will allow the engine to provide
2nd to 1st 23
braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
3rd to 2nd 85 they may overheat, resulting in
brake failure.
4th to 3rd 130 When driving on slippery roads,
5th to 4th 180* slow down before downshifting.
Excessive and/or sudden changes
in engine speed may cause loss of
For D13A engine models traction, which could cause you to
Downshifting km/h lose control.
EXAMPLE 2nd to 1st 22
56RM03002
3rd to 2nd 80
NOTICE
Starting off Check that the vehicle is completely
To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the 4th to 3rd 125 stationary before you shift into
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear. reverse.
After releasing the parking brake, gradually 5th to 4th 175*
release the clutch. When you hear a
change in the engines sound, slowly press *NOTE: NOTICE
the accelerator while continuing to gradu- You may not accelerate to the maximum
ally release the clutch. allowable speed because of the driving sit- To help avoid clutch damage, do
uation and/or the vehicle condition. not use the clutch pedal as a foot-
Shifting rest while driving or use the clutch
All forward gears are synchronized and NOTICE to keep the vehicle stationary on a
provide quiet and easy shifting. Always slope. Depress the clutch fully
Do not downshift to a lower gear at when shifting.
depress the clutch pedal all the way to the
the speed faster than the maximum When shifting or starting off, do not
floor before shifting gears. Keep the
allowable speeds for the next lower race the engine. Racing the engine
engine speed from rising into the red zone
speed, or severe damage to engine can shorten engine life and cause
of the tachometer.
and transaxle can result. negative effect to smooth shifting.

3-16

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Auto Gear Shift Starting the engine


Auto Gear Shift is a 5-speed forward/ When starting the engine, always place the
reverse transaxle. gearshift lever in the N position and
Auto Gear Shift has the basic features of depress the brake pedal firmly. The engine
conventional manual transaxle, but clutch cannot be started unless the gearshift
operation and transaxle gear shifting are lever is in the N position and the brake
controlled electronically. pedal is depressed.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE 56RM03001 If you parked vehicle with gear engaged on
last time (if you can see 1 or R), shift
Do not depress both the brake pedal Depress brake pedal indicator into N (Neutral) and depress the brake
and accelerator pedal simultane- pedal. Hold the brake pedal while starting
ously. the engine. You can hear buzzer in short
This can cause damage or overheat- time.
ing to the clutch.
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
When you open the drivers door, the Auto
Gear Shift systems run automatically and 76MH0A047
you may hear an operating noise. This This light will come on if you do not
sound does not indicate malfunction. depress the brake pedal in the following
situations.
76MH0A056
When starting the engine.
When the engine is on and the gearshift NOTE:
lever is shifted from N position to D, If you start the engine without the gearshift
M or R position. lever in the N position, the gear position
When the ignition switch is in ON posi- indicator in the instrument cluster will blink.
tion or the ignition mode is ON, and the
engine is off, the gearshift lever is shifted Clutch operation
into any position. You can select either the Drive (D) mode or
This light will also come on if one of the the Manual (M) mode. Since this vehicle
gears cannot be engaged and the system controls clutch operation electronically in
is unable to re-try shifting when you shift either mode, you do not need to operate
EXAMPLE the gearshift lever from N position to D, the clutch.
56RM03003 M or R position.

3-17

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Creeping function NOTE:


This vehicle has a creeping function that NOTICE If 1st gear cannot be engaged even
helps the vehicle to start smoothly by though the gearshift lever has been
engaging the clutch. When the gearshift A buzzer will sound continuously if shifted from the N to the D position,
lever is in any of the positions D, M or the vehicle is operated with the gear- the system will re-try shifting automati-
R, and you release your foot from the shift lever in-between of each shift cally. This will take some time, noise
brake pedal, the vehicle starts slowly with- positions. The vehicle will become may be heard from the gears, and shift-
out depressing the accelerator pedal. inoperative if you continue to operate ing gear shock may occur. However,
However, creep is not possible in manual the vehicle with the gearshift lever in they do not indicate malfunction.
(M) mode with 2nd gear engaged. The between shift positions. The N indicator will flash, the depress
creeping function is disabled if you brake pedal indicator will come on and a
depress the brake pedal or pull up the Drive (D) mode warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will
parking brake lever. When the Drive (D) mode is activated, the sound if any of the following cases
most appropriate gear position is automati- occur;
NOTE: cally selected upon operation of the accel- If you shift the gearshift lever from the
If the drivers door is opened and/or the erator pedal and variation of vehicle N to the D position without depress-
parking brake lever is engaged with the speed. ing the brake pedal
gear in the M, D or R position, the If the system is unable to re-try shifting
creeping function will not operate. Normal driving: You should depress the brake pedal and
1) Start the engine as instructed in Start- shift the gearshift lever to N position, then
Parking and Stopping the vehicle ing the engine in this section. shift to D again.
Auto Gear Shift does not have a parking 2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift
position. Park the vehicle with a gear the gearshift lever to the D position. 3) Release the parking brake and brake
engaged. Make sure that the gearshift When the gearshift lever is shifted to pedal.
lever is D, M, or R. the D position, the gear will be shifted 4) Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.
Also, check the instrument cluster to make to 1st.
sure that the transaxle is engaged in 1 or
R position. EXAMPLE

76MH0A057

3-18

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

release the parking brake and depress


WARNING NOTICE the accelerator pedal to start off.
While driving the vehicle, do not Do not operate the system as
shift the gearshift lever to the N described below. The life cycle of the
NOTICE
position. The engine brake may not clutch may be reduced. On an uphill slope, never hold the
work and you may get involved in Using the accelerator pedal to hold vehicle at a stop using only the accel-
an unexpected accident. If you the vehicle on an uphill slope with erator pedal or the creeping function.
return the gearshift lever from N the gearshift lever in the D or M If you perform this operation for a
to D because of unintended shift- position. If you perform this opera- certain period of time, a warning
ing, the gear position will be shifted tion for a certain period of time, a buzzer will sound, and in some cases
according to the current vehicle warning buzzer will sound. the engine will stall. This can also
speed. Shifting the gearshift lever to the cause excessive damage to the
Always keep your foot on the brake D, M or R position while rac- clutch.
pedal while stopped with the ing the engine.
engine running. This operation pre- Driving at low speed using a high Downhill
vents the vehicle from moving due gear. 1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the
to unintended activation of the Holding the vehicle on an uphill gearshift lever to the D position. Make
creeping function. slope using the creeping function. sure that the gear is in 1st by checking
If you perform this operation for a the gear position indicator.
certain period of time, a warning 2) Release the brake pedal and depress
NOTICE buzzer will sound. the accelerator pedal slowly. Even if the
If the gearshift lever cannot shift into accelerator pedal is not depressed, the
any position, or the gear is changed clutch will be engaged when the vehicle
to N position automatically when
Starting off on an uphill/downhill:
speed increases.
the vehicle speed becomes less than Uphill
10 km/h, there may be a systematic 1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that Using engine braking:
malfunction. In this case, ask an the vehicle does not roll backwards. When driving on a downhill slope, down-
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop 2) Shift the gearshift lever to the D posi- shifting is recommended. So you can use
to inspect the Auto Gear Shift system tion while depressing the brake pedal. engine braking.
as soon as possible. Make sure that the gear position indica- By placing the gearshift lever in the M
tor in the instrumental cluster displays position, the Manual (M) mode is selected,
1st gear. and you can shift to a lower gear manually.
3) Release the brake pedal and depress For details of downshift operation, refer to
the accelerator pedal gradually, and Upshift and downshift in the Manual (M)
when the vehicle starts to move, mode.

3-19

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Manual (M) mode


The gears are not shifted automatically. To EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
shift the transaxle, the driver must operate
the gearshift lever to the + or direc-
tion.
As for conventional manual transaxle vehi-
cles, releasing the accelerator pedal a little
may help the transaxle to shift smoothly.
76MH0A059 76MH0A061
Upshift and downshift: Downshifting The gear position is displayed on the gear
Upshifting EXAMPLE position indicator. The gear position indica-
tor shows the transaxle gear position.
EXAMPLE Before starting off, always make sure
transaxle is engaged in 1st or reverse gear
and gear position indicator is showing the
intended gear, then depress the accelera-
tor pedal. It is possible to start vehicle in
2nd gear using manual mode, from stop
condition.

NOTE:
Always use 1st gear while starting off an
uphill slope otherwise you can damage
the clutch.
56RH00310 To downshift smoothly, the engine runs
56RH00309
Push the gearshift lever to the direction fast in some cases. This is done inten-
Pull the gearshift lever to the + direction and release it. Every time the lever is oper- tionally by the system and is not mal-
and release it. Every time the lever is oper- ated, the transaxle is downshifted in the function.
ated, the transaxle is upshifting 1 step in order 5th o4th o3rd o2nd o1st gear. When driving down a hill, downshift and
the order of 1st o2nd o3rd o4th o5th use the engine braking appropriately. If
gear. necessary, continuous downshifting is
possible. However, if downshifting more
than 3 steps, gear shifting will take more
time.

3-20

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

When the gear is shifting, a noise can be Starting off:


heard in some case. This is not malfunc- NOTICE 1) Start the engine as instructed in Start-
tion. ing the engine in this section.
If the gearshift lever cannot shift 2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift
into any position, or the gear is the gearshift lever to the M position.
WARNING changed to N position automati- When the gearshift lever is shifted to
cally when the vehicle speed the M position, the gear will be shifted
Be careful when accelerating, becomes less than 10 km/h, there
upshifting, downshifting or braking to 1st. Before starting off, always make
may be a systematic malfunction. sure that the intended gear is engaged
on a slippery surface. Sudden In this case, ask an authorised
acceleration or engine braking by checking the gear position indicator,
Maruti Suzuki workshop to inspect then depress the accelerator pedal.
could cause the vehicle to spin or the Auto Gear Shift system as soon
skid. While starting off on a slip- as possible.
pery or snowy roads, please use NOTE:
The manual (M) mode does not If 1st gear cannot be engaged even
2nd gear (if required). upshift even if the engine speed
To drive down a long or steep hill, though the gearshift lever has been
reaches the rev-limit. shifted from the N to the M position,
reduce your speed and downshift. The system will not allow shifting
Remember, if you ride the brakes the system will re-try shifting automati-
up or down to a gear that would cally.This will take some time, noise may
excessively, they may overheat and cause engine over-revving or
fail. be heard from the gears, and shifting
under-revving. gear shock may occur. However, they do
While driving the vehicle, do not If frequently driving at low speed
shift the gearshift lever to N posi- not indicate malfunction.
using a high gear position, the life The N indicator will flash, the depress
tion. The engine brake may not cycle of the clutch may be reduced.
work and you may get involved in brake pedal indicator will come on and a
Frequent downshifting (more than warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will
an unexpected accident. If you 3 positions consecutively) causes
return the gearshift lever from N sound if any of the following cases
the reduction of transaxle life. occur;
to M because of unintended shift-
ing, the gear position will be shifted If you shift the gearshift lever from the
according to the current vehicle N to the M position without
speed. depressing the brake pedal.
Do not apply the parking brake If the system is unable to re-try shift-
while driving. Otherwise, it could ing.
cause a skid and you may get You should depress the brake pedal and
involved in an unexpected acci- shift the gearshift lever to N position, then
dent. shift to M position again a few seconds
later.

3-21

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

3) Release the parking brake and brake Starting off on an uphill/downhill Downhill
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slope: 1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the
slowly for smooth starting. gearshift lever to the M position.
Uphill Make sure the gear position indicator to
WARNING 1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that make sure that the gear is in 1st.
the vehicle does not roll backwards. 2) Release the brake pedal and depress
Always keep your foot on the brake 2) Shift the gearshift lever to the M posi- the accelerator pedal slowly. Even
pedal while stopped with the engine tion while depressing the brake pedal. though the accelerator pedal is not
running. These operations prevent Make sure that the gear position indica- depressed, the clutch will be engaged
the vehicle from starting due to unin- tor in the instrumental cluster displays when the vehicle speed increases.
tended activation of the creeping 1st gear.
function. 3) Release the brake pedal and depress Backing up
the accelerator pedal gradually, and After the vehicle has stopped completely,
when the vehicle starts to move, depress the brake pedal and shift the gear-
NOTICE release the parking brake and depress shift lever to the R position. Depress the
Do not operate the system as the accelerator pedal to start off. accelerator pedal slowly as when starting
described below. The life cycle of the off in 1st gear. Before backing up, make
clutch may be reduced. NOTICE sure that reverse gear is selected by
Using the accelerator pedal to hold On an uphill slope, never hold the checking the gear position indicator.
the vehicle on an uphill slope oper- vehicle at a stop using only the accel-
ation with the gearshift lever in the erator pedal or creeping function. If EXAMPLE
M or D position. If you perform you perform this operation for a cer-
this operation for a certain period tain period of time, a warning buzzer
of time, a warning buzzer will will sound, and in some cases the
sound. engine will stall. This can also cause
Shifting the gearshift lever to the excessive damage to the clutch. In
M, D or R position while rac- case the warning buzzer is on, shift-
ing the engine. ing to 2nd gear will not be possible in 76MH0A062
Driving at low speed using a high manual mode. Always use 1st gear
gear. while starting off on a uphill slope.
Stopping on a slope using the Otherwise you may damage the
creeping function. If you perform clutch.
this operation for a certain period
of time, a warning buzzer will
sound.

3-22

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
If reverse gear cannot be engaged even NOTICE WARNING
though the gearshift lever has been
shifted from the N to the R position, On a downhill slope, never hold the When stopping, for example, at a
the system will re-try shifting automati- vehicle at a stop using only the accel- traffic light, be sure to depress the
cally.This will take some time, noise may erator pedal or the creeping function. brake pedal firmly. For your safety,
be heard from the gears, and shifting If you perform this operation for a apply the parking brake, too, when
gear shock may occur. However, they do certain period of time, a warning stopping on a hill.
not indicate malfunction. buzzer will sound, and in some cases When racing the engine, make sure
The N indicator will flash, the depress the engine will stall. This can also that the gear is in the N position
brake pedal indicator will come on and a cause excessive damage to the by checking the gear position indi-
warning buzzer (long pulse sound) will clutch. cator. If the accelerator is operated
sound if any of the following cases with the gear in any other position,
occur; Stopping the vehicle may move resulting in
If you shift the gearshift lever from the The vehicle can be stopped by depressing an unexpected accident.
N to the R position without depress- the brake pedal regardless of the gear Do not leave your vehicle unat-
ing the brake pedal. position. This is because the clutch is auto- tended while the engine is running.
If the system is unable to re-try shift- matically disengaged to prevent the engine When leaving the vehicle, stop the
ing. from stopping. engine and park the vehicle with a
You should depress the brake pedal and If the gearshift lever is in the D position, gear engaged. If you need to leave
shift the gearshift lever to N position, the gear will be downshifted to 1st when the vehicle with the engine running,
then shift to R position again a few sec- the vehicle stops. apply the parking brakes firmly,
onds later. If the gearshift lever is in the M posi- and shift the gearshift lever to the
The system will not allow shifting to the tion, the gear will be downshifted to 1st N position. Otherwise, the vehi-
R position if the vehicle speed is over when the vehicle stops. cle may move unexpectedly and
about 3 km/h. If the gearshift lever is may cause an accident.
operated under this condition, the N
indicator in the instrument cluster will
blink. However, when the vehicle speed
drops below about 3 km/h, the gear will
be shifted to reverse. Make sure that the
vehicle has stopped completely before
shifting to the R position.

3-23

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

slope and confirm the gear position by


NOTICE checking the gear position indicator. WARNING
3) Stop the engine.
On a slope, never hold the vehicle 4) In the case of uphill/downhill slope, If the gear is not engaged properly
at a stop using only the accelerator release the parking brake and brake and completely before the ignition
pedal or the creeping function. If pedal slowly in order to check the gear switch is turned to LOCK posi-
you perform this operation for a is engaged. tion or the engine switch is pressed
certain period of time, a warning 5) After check the vehicle stopped by the to change the ignition mode to
buzzer will sound, and in some gear engaged, Apply the parking brake LOCK (OFF), the vehicle may not
cases the engine will stall. This can and the brake pedal firmly again. be parked with the gear engaged.
also cause excessive damage to 6) Get out of the vehicle and put chocks Always confirm the gear position
the clutch. under the wheels. by checking the gear position indi-
If the gearshift lever is operated When you return to your vehicle, you must cator when parking.
more than necessary, the system remember to remove the wheel chocks. On a downhill slope, the gear
may not allow operation of the should be put in reverse, and in 1st
gearshift lever for a certain period NOTE: gear on an uphill slope. In case of
of time, and the gear may not be After the engine is stopped, the gear in uphill/downhill slope, after check-
shifted appropriately. Therefore, do the transaxle does not change even if ing the vehicle stopped by the gear
not operate the gearshift lever if not you shift the gearshift lever in any posi- engaged, put the chocks under the
necessary. tion. Always shift the gearshift lever wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle may
before stop the engine. move, and cause an unexpected
Parking Check the transaxle gear position by accident. If the gear is left in the
Unlike an automatic transaxle, Auto Gear looking at the gear position indicator, N position, the vehicle cannot be
Shift does not have a parking position. The then turn the ignition switch to LOCK parked with a gear engaged.
vehicle can be parked with the gearshift position or press the engine switch to
lever at D or R position. Remember, change the ignition mode to LOCK
even though the transaxle is in gear, you (OFF), to stop the engine. Release the
must set the parking brake firmly. Park the brake pedal after a few seconds.
vehicle with a gear engaged.
1) Apply the parking brake firmly.
2) While depressing the brake pedal, shift
the gearshift lever to the R position on
a downhill slope, and to the 1st position
in the drive (D) mode or the M position
in the manual (M) mode on an uphill

3-24

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Parking cancel to LOCK position or press the engine Gearshift Indicator


Depress the brake pedal, turn the ignition switch to change the ignition mode
switch to the ON position or press the LOCK (OFF). (if equipped)
engine switch to change the ignition mode During a stop, the drivers door is
With tachometer
to ON, and shift the gearshift lever to the opened with the gearshift lever in the
N position. The gear will be disengaged. R, D or M position while the engine
is running.
Warning functions
A warning buzzer will sound or the indica- N indicator blinking
tor will blink under the following conditions. When the gear indicator lamp blinks N,
you should depress the brake pedal and
Warning buzzer shift the gearshift lever to N position.
The clutch is heated due to excessive
load. 1st indicator blinking
The creeping function is being activated When the gear indicator lamp blinks 1st,
for a long period of time. you should depress the brake pedal and
shift the gearshift lever to N position, then (1) EXAMPLE
NOTICE shift to D or M position again a few sec-
56RH00321
onds later.
In the above cases, pull over to the Without tachometer
side of the road and stop the engine,
and then ask an authorised Maruti R indicator blinking
Suzuki workshop to inspect your When the gear indicator lamp blinks R,
vehicle. Otherwise, the clutch disc you should depress the brake pedal and
may be damaged. shift the gearshift lever to N position, then
shift to R position again a few seconds
later.
The ignition switch is turned to LOCK
position or the engine switch is pressed
to change the ignition mode to LOCK
(OFF) with the gear in 2nd, 3rd, 4th or
5th. In this case, turn the ignition switch
to ON position or press the engine (1)
switch to change the ignition mode to EXAMPLE
ON, and shift the gearshift lever in the 56RH00320
N position, shift it to the D or M or (1) Gearshift indicator
R position, then turn the ignition switch

3-25

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

In the following case, the gearshift indica- NOTE:


tor is indicated in the information display The gearshift indicator is not indicated when the gear position is in N (Neutral).
when the ignition switch is in the ON If you depress the clutch pedal while UP/DOWN arrow is indicated, the indication will
position or the ignition mode is ON. disappear.
The indication of gearshift indicator timing may differ depending on the vehicle condition
When the gearshift lever is in a position and/or driving situation even in the same vehicle speed and engine revolution.
other than N (Neutral).
The electronic control system monitors Example of the gearshift indicator
driving condition (such as vehicle speed Indication Description
and/or engine revolution), and it recom-
mends gearshift for your driving with indi-
cations on display. Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or
engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear position is recom-
If UP/DOWN arrow is indicated on the dis- mended.
play while driving, we recommend you to
shift up or down. It is the optimal gear posi-
tion for a driving condition that reduces the Higher gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or
over revolution and stress to the engine, engine revolution. Changing to a lower gear position is recom-
and improves fuel consumption. mended.
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to Using the Transaxle in this sec-
tion.

WARNING
The gearshift indicator is designed to
indicate optimal gear position for
your driving, however, a driver will
not be relieved from the duty of care
of driving operation or gear change
with this indicator.
To drive safe, do not gaze the gear-
shift indicator, pay attention to your
driving situation and shift up or down
if necessary.

3-26

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Parking sensors Sensor locations


WARNING
(if equipped) EXAMPLE
The parking sensor warns you of
The parking sensor system uses ultra- obstacles with buzzers. However,
sonic sensors to detect obstacles near you must still pay full attention
the rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed yourself while driving.
while you are parking or moving the The sensors can detect obstacles
vehicle slowly, the system warns you by only within a limited area and only
sounding a buzzer. when the vehicle is moving within a
The system emits an ultrasonic wave limited speed range. So, in tricky
and the relevant sensor detects the areas, you must move the vehicle
return of the wave reflected by an obsta- slowly while checking around it
cle. The system measures the time using your direct vision or rearview
taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the mirrors. There is increased risk of (2) (1) (1) (2)
obstacle and return from it, from which it an accident if you control the vehi- 56RH00312
determines the obstacles position. cle relying only on the parking sen-
The parking sensor function can be used sor. (1) Rear center sensors (2 places)
when the engine switch is pressed to (2) Rear corner sensors (2 places)
change the ignition mode to ON, the
gearshift lever is in the R position and NOTICE NOTICE
the parking sensor switch is in the ON
Parking sensors are only for Avoid hitting the sensor areas or
position. This function is helpful in the
drivers assistance. directing the nozzle of a high-pres-
following cases: pulling over to the curb;
sure car washer onto the sensor
parallel-parking the vehicle; steering the
areas. Otherwise, the sensors may
vehicle into a garage; driving along an
be damaged.
alley; and moving slowly in a place with
If the bumper hits a hard object, the
obstacles.
sensors on it may not work prop-
erly. If this occurs, have the sen-
sors inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.

3-27

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Working sensors Approximate areas where obstacles can


The sensors that work depends on the position of the gearshift lever as follows: be detected
EXAMPLE
Manual transaxle Auto Gear Shift
Gearshift lever position
R N, 1st 5th R N, D or M
Center On Off On Off
Rear sensors
Corner On Off On Off

79MH0308

An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in)


from a sensor or just below a sensor is
not detectable.
The sensors can detect an obstacle up
to about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear of
vehicle.

3-28

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
WARNING WARNING Thin poles or obstacles lower than the
sensors may become undetectable as
Under the following conditions, the (Continued) the vehicle moves closer to them even if
parking sensor system may not Sensors have intercepted ultra- they have been detected from longer
work normally because the sensors sonic noise from another vehi- distances.
cannot detect obstacles correctly. cles horn, engine, air braking The system may calculate the distance
Sensors are covered with mud, system (large vehicles), or park- to a road sign or similar obstacle to be
ice or other materials (Such ing sensor. shorter than the actual distance.
materials must be removed for Obstacles are too close to the
normal operation). sensors.
Sensors are wet from water Sensors are at an angle to a
How to use the parking sensor
splashes or heavy rain. highly reflective object such as Parking sensor switch
Sensors are covered by a hand, glass (Ultrasonic waves are not EXAMPLE
sticker, accessory, etc. reflected back from the obstacle).
There is an accessory or other Sensors may not be able to cor- (2)
object attached within the sen- rectly detect the following types of
sors sensing area. obstacles:
Items such as tow hooks, com- Objects made of a thin material
mercially available corner poles, like wire netting and ropes.
radio antenna, etc. are installed Square-shaped curbstones or (1)
on the bumper. other objects with sharp edges.
The height of the bumper is Tall objects with a large upper
changed due to alteration to the part like a road sign.
suspension or other causes. Low-profile objects such as curb-
The sensor areas are extremely stones.
hot from direct sunlight or cold Sound-absorbing objects such 56RH00322
due to freezing weather. as cotton and snow.
The vehicle is on a rough sur- (1) Parking sensor switch
face, slope, gravel road or grass (2) Indicator
field.
The vehicle is at a steep angle.
(Continued)

3-29

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to ON with the parking sensor Obstacle indication by parking
switch in the ON position. sensor
Push the switch again and it stays in; this is the OFF position. The indicator in the Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking
switch goes out and the parking sensor is deactivated. sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound.
A buzzer located behind the rear seat
Switch position State sounds when a sensor at the rear
detects an obstacle.
ON
When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are
met, system becomes ready for operation.

OFF
The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the
indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.

NOTE:
If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON, the inside buzzer sounds.
When the gearshift lever is shifted to the R (Reverse) position with the system ON, a
buzzer will sound once.

3-30

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors Warning and indicator messages
If there is a problem or warning regarding
Distance (approx.) Buzzer the parking sensor system, a buzzer and
the status of the indicator on the parking
45 60 cm sensor inform it. Follow its instruction.
Short beeps at short intervals
(18 24 in.) The buzzer sounds intermittently. The
35 45 cm indicated sensor is contaminated. Wipe
Short beeps at very short intervals it clean with a soft cloth. If the buzzer
(14 18 in.)
does not stop after wiping, there may be
Less than 35 cm problem with the parking sensor system.
Continuous beep
(14 in.) Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors The indicator does not come on when
the parking sensor switch is pressed.
Distance (approx.) Buzzer The indicator goes off while operating.
There may be a problem with the parking
60 150 cm sensor system. Have your vehicle
Short beeps at long intervals
(24 59 in.) inspected by an authorised Maruti
45 60 cm Suzuki workshop.
Short beeps at short intervals
(18 24 in.)
35 45 cm
Short beeps at very short intervals
(14 18 in.)
Less than 35 cm
Continuous beep
(14 in.)

3-31

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Rearview camera
NOTICE NOTICE
(if equipped)
If you use the rearview camera for a The rearview camera is a precision
When the gearshift lever is shifted to R long time when the ignition mode is instrument. If you strike the camera,
position while the ignition mode is ON, ON, but the engine is not running, it may be broken and cause damage
the rearview camera system automatically the battery may discharge. resulting in a catch fire or a malfunc-
shows the view behind the vehicle on the Do not leave the ignition mode ON tion.
display. for a long time when the engine is not Do not strike the camera.
running. Do not remove snow or mud on the
WARNING camera lens with a stick.
The distance viewed in the rearview Rearview camera location
camera may differ from the actual NOTICE
distance according to the condition
of road or the load the vehicle is car- If water enters the rearview camera, it
rying. Since the camera display area may cause a malfunction or catch
is also limited, backing up by only fire.
looking at the display may cause an Do not use high pressure water
accident or a crash with an object. around the camera.
The rearview camera cannot replace
the drivers attention. The driver
alone is responsible for parking and NOTICE
similar driving maneuvers. This lens is hard coated to prevent
(1)
Use the rearview camera only to damage or discoloration. Damage or
provide driving assistance. discoloration of lens may obscure
Always drive carefully confirming EXAMPLE the image.
the safety of the rear and the sur- 56RH00315
Do not use a brush to clean lens.
rounding conditions by looking (1) Rearview camera Do not use alcohol, benzene or
directly with your eyes and using thinner to clean the lens.
the rear view mirror. The rearview camera is installed beside Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Check that the trunk lid is securely the license plate light.
closed when backing up. NOTE:
If body wax gets on the camera lens, wipe
off the wax with a clean cloth dampened
with mild detergent diluted with water, and
then wipe the lens with a dry cloth.

3-32

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

How to use rearview camera Display range of rearview camera NOTE:


1) Press the engine switch to change the EXAMPLE Images shown on the display from the
ignition mode to ON. rearview camera are reversed images
2) Shift the gearshift lever in R position. (mirror images).
The display automatically shows the The colors of objects on the rearview
view behind the vehicle. (1) camera may differ from the actual object
When the gearshift lever is shifted colors.
from R to another gearshift lever The rearview camera display may be dif-
position, the display returns to the ficult to see under the following condi-
previous display. tions, but this is not a system
malfunction.
NOTE: In dark areas, on a rainy day or at
The rearview camera display has first pri- night.
ority in any display mode. However, the When the temperature around the lens
rearview camera display does not show 57L210301
is too high/low, or the camera is wet
the rear view while the system is initializ- such as on a rainy day or during peri-
ing. ods of high humidity (dew condensa-
EXAMPLE tion may occur on the camera lens).
Display range of rearview camera (1) When a foreign object such as mud or
The rearview camera display shows the a drop of water is stuck around the
area behind the rear end of the bumper. camera lens.
The display cannot show objects which are When strong light directly enters the
close to the bumper or under the bumper. camera (vertical lines may be seen on
The rearview camera display cannot show the display).
obstacles which are higher than the cam- Under fluorescent light (The display
era. Upper parts of tall objects such as may flicker).
road signs cannot be viewed on the dis- When the outside temperature is low
play. (the image on the display may be
darkened).
57L210302 Rearview camera screen indication
(1) Display range The distance viewed in the rearview cam-
era may differ from the actual distance
according to the condition of the road or
the load the vehicle is carrying.

3-33

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Uphill incline behind the vehicle When there is a downhill incline behind the Braking
vehicle, the object shown on the display
(1) appears closer than the actual distance. EXAMPLE
If the rear view from the rearview cam-
era is not shown or there is a poor
image
(2) If the rear view from the rearview camera
is not shown.
(3) Check that the ignition mode is ON.
EXAMPLE
Check that the gearshift lever is
79MH0313
shifted to R position.
(1) Object
(2) Actual distance If the image from the rearview camera is
(3) Distance on the display poor.
Check that the camera lens is not dirty.
When there is an uphill incline behind the Check that light from the sun or the
60G165S
vehicle, the object shown on the display beam of the headlights from the vehi- The distance needed to bring any vehicle
appears farther away than the actual dis- cle behind is not shining directly into to a halt increases with the speed of the
tance. the lens. vehicle. The braking distance needed, for
Downhill incline behind the vehicle example, at 60 km/h will be approximately
If the rearview camera system is still not 4 times greater than the braking distance
(1) working properly after checking the above, needed at 30 km/h. Start to depress the
have the system inspected by an autho- brake pedal when there is plenty of dis-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as tance between your vehicle and the stop-
possible. ping point, and slow down gradually.

(3)
(2)
EXAMPLE
79MH0314

(1) Object
(2) Actual distance
(3) Distance on the display

3-34

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

You may feel the brake pedal move a little


WARNING WARNING while the ABS is operating.
If water gets into the brake devices, Even without reserve power in the NOTE:
brake performance may become poor brake system, you can still stop the The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is
and unpredictable. After driving vehicle by pressing the brake pedal under about 9 km/h.
through water or washing the under- harder than normally required. How- If the ABS system is activated, you may
side of the vehicle, test the brakes ever, the stopping distance may be hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsat-
while driving at a slow speed to see if longer. ing in the brake pedal. This is normal
they have maintained their normal and indicates that the brake fluid pres-
effectiveness. If the brakes are less Brake assist system (if equipped) sure is being controlled properly.
effective than normal, dry them by When you slam the brakes on, the brake You may hear an operation sound when
repeatedly applying the brakes while assist system determines it to be an emer- you start the engine or after the vehicle
driving slowly until the brakes have gency stop and provides more powerful begins to move. This means that the
regained their normal effectiveness. braking for a driver who cannot hold down above systems are in the self-check
the brake pedal firmly. mode. This sound does not indicate a
Power-assisted brakes malfunction.
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If NOTE:
power assistance is lost due to a stalled If you quickly and forcefully depress the WARNING
engine or other failures, the system is still brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in
fully operational on reserve power and you the brake pedal. This is normal and indi- On some types of loose surfaces
can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by cates that the brake assist system is acti- (such as gravel, snow-covered
pressing the brake pedal once and holding vated properly. roads, etc.), the stopping distance
it down. The reserve power is partly used required for a vehicle with ABS
up when you depress the brake pedal and Anti-lock brake system (ABS) may be slightly greater than the
reduces each time the pedal is pressed. ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec- one required for a comparable vehi-
Apply smooth and even pressure to the tronically controlling braking pressure. It cle with a conventional brake sys-
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. will also help you maintain steering control tem. With a conventional brake
when braking on slippery surfaces or when system, skidding tires are able to
braking hard. plow the gravel or snow layer,
The ABS works automatically, so you do shortening the stopping distance.
not need any special braking technique. ABS minimizes this resistance
Just push the brake pedal down without effect. Allow for extra stopping dis-
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever tance when driving on loose sur-
it senses that the wheels are locking up. faces.
(Continued)

3-35

56RH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

How ABS works


WARNING WARNING A computer continuously monitors wheel
speed. The computer compares the
(Continued) If the ABS warning light (1) on the changes in wheel speed when braking. If
On regular paved roads, some driv- instrument cluster comes on and the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a
ers may be able to obtain slightly stays on while driving, there may skidding situation, the computer will
shorter stopping distances with be a problem with the ABS system. change braking pressure several times
conventional brake systems than Ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki each second to prevent the wheels from
with ABS. workshop to inspect the ABS sys- locking. When you start your vehicle or
In both of the above conditions, tem immediately. If the ABS system when you accelerate after a hard stop, you
ABS will still offer the advantage of becomes inoperative, the brake may hear a momentary motor or clicking
helping you maintain directional system will function as an ordinary noise as the system resets or checks itself.
control. However, remember that brake system that has no ABS.
ABS will not compensate for bad If the ABS warning light (1) and the
road or weather conditions or poor brake system warning light (2) on WARNING
driver judgment. Use good judg- the instrument cluster simultane- The ABS may not work properly if
ment and do not drive too fast. ously stay on or come on while tires or wheels other than those
driving, both anti-lock function and specified in the owners manual are
rear brake force control function used. This is because the ABS works
EXAMPLE (proportioning valve function) of by comparing changes in wheel
the ABS system may have failed. If speed. When replacing tires or
so, the rear wheels may easily skid wheels, use only the size and type
or the vehicle can even spin in the specified in this owners manual.
worst case when braking on a slip-
pery road or when hard braking
even on a dry paved road. Ask an
(1) (2) authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
to inspect the ABS system immedi-
ately. Drive carefully, avoiding hard
braking as much as possible.

54MM069

(1) ABS warning light


(2) Brake system warning light

3-36

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

DRIVING TIPS
Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1
Catalytic converter .............................................................. 4-1
Improving fuel economy ..................................................... 4-2
Highway driving .................................................................. 4-3
Driving on hills .................................................................... 4-3
Driving on slippery roads ................................................... 4-4 4
Driving on wet roads ........................................................... 4-5
Off-road driving ................................................................... 4-6
Dos and Donts for save driving ....................................... 4-6
Margin for safety ................................................................. 4-8

60G409

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Running-in Catalytic converter


EXAMPLE
NOTICE EXAMPLE
The future performance and reliabil-
ity of the engine depends on the care
and restraint exercised during its
early life. It is especially important to
observe the following precautions
during the first 960 km of vehicle
operation.
After starting, do not race the
engine. Warm it up gradually.
Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
68PHM4001 at a constant speed. Moving parts
will break in better if you vary your 80G106
WARNING speed.
Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
Fasten your seat belts at all times. full throttle starts. minimize the amount of harmful pollutants
Even though air bags are equipped Avoid hard braking, especially in your vehicles exhaust. Use of leaded
at the front seating positions, the during the first 320 km of driving. fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic
driver and all passengers should Do not drive slowly with the trans- converters is prohibited, because lead
be properly restrained at all times, axle in a high gear. deactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-
using the seat belts provided. Refer Drive the vehicle at moderate nents of the catalyst system.
to Seat belts and child restraint engine speeds.
systems section for instructions The converter is designed to last the life of
Do not tow a trailer. the vehicle under normal usage and when
on proper use of the seat belts.
Never drive under the influence of unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-
alcohol or other drugs. Alcohol and nance is required on the converter. How-
drugs can seriously impair your ever, it is very important to keep the engine
ability to drive safely, greatly properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can
increasing the risk of injury to result from an improperly tuned engine,
yourself and others. You should may cause overheating of the catalytic
also avoid driving when you are converter. This may result in permanent
tired, sick, irritated or under stress. heat damage to the catalytic converter and
other vehicle components.

4-1

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Improving fuel economy


NOTICE EXAMPLE The following instructions will help you
To minimize the possibility of cata- improve fuel economy.
lytic converter or other vehicle dam- Avoid excessive idling
age: If you park your vehicle for more than one
Maintain the engine in the proper minute, stop the engine and start it again
operating condition. later. When warming up a cold engine, do
In the event of an engine malfunc- not allow the engine to idle or apply full
tion, particularly one involving throttle until the engine has reached oper-
engine misfire or other apparent ating temperature. Allow the engine to
loss of performance, have the vehi- warm up by driving.
cle serviced promptly.
Do not turn off the engine or inter- Avoid sudden acceleration
rupt the ignition when the transaxle 54G584S
Sudden acceleration starting from rest or
is in gear and the vehicle is in while driving will consume fuel unneces-
motion. sarily and shorten engine life. Start off
Do not try to start the engine by WARNING slowly.
pushing or towing the vehicle, or Be careful where you park and drive; Avoid unnecessary stops
coasting down a hill. the catalytic converter and other Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-
Do not idle the engine with any exhaust components can get very ping. Try to maintain a moderate, steady
spark plug wires disconnected or hot. As with any vehicle, do not park speed whenever possible. Slowing down
removed, such as during diagnos- or operate this vehicle in areas where and then accelerating again uses more
tic testing. combustible materials such as dry fuel.
Do not idle the vehicle for pro- grass or leaves can come in contact
longed periods if idling seems with a hot exhaust system. Keep a steady cruising speed
rough or there are other malfunc- Drive at a constant speed that road and
tions. traffic conditions will permit.
Do not allow the fuel tank to get
near the empty level.

4-2

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Keep the air cleaner clean Highway driving Driving on hills


EXAMPLE When driving at highway speeds, pay
attention to the following: Manual transaxle
Stopping distance progressively EXAMPLE
increases with vehicle speed. Apply the
brakes far enough ahead of the stopping
point to allow for the extra stopping dis-
tance.
On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur.
Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact
between the road surface and the vehi-
cles tires due to a water film forming
between them. Steering or braking the
vehicle during hydroplaning can be very
60A183S difficult, and loss of control can occur. 68PM00401

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there Keep speed down when the road sur- Auto Gear Shift
will be greater intake resistance, resulting face is wet.
At high speeds, the vehicle may be EXAMPLE
in decreased power output and increased
fuel consumption. affected by side winds. Therefore,
reduce speed and be prepared for unex-
Keep weight to a minimum pected buffeting, which can occur at the
The heavier the load is, the more fuel the exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut
vehicle consumes. Unload any unneces- of a hill, or when being overtaken by
sary luggage or cargo. large vehicles, etc.
Keep tire pressures correct
Under-inflation of the tires can waste fuel
due to increased rolling resistance of the
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct 56RM03003
pressure shown in the label on the drivers When driving on steep hills, the vehicle
door lock pillar. may begin to slow down and show a lack
of power. If this happens, you should
shift to a lower gear so that the engine
will again be operating in its higher
power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the
vehicle from losing momentum.

4-3

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

When driving down a hill, the engine Driving on slippery roads driving about 1.0 km if necessary. With the
should be used for braking by shifting to chains installed, drive slowly.
the next lower gear.
NOTICE
While moving uphill/gradient from a If you hear the chains hitting
stand still condition against the vehicle body while driv-
Apply the parking brake firmly so that the ing, stop and tighten them.
vehicle does not roll backwards. If your vehicle is equipped with full
Depress the Clutch pedal and Shift the wheel caps, remove the wheel caps
gearshift lever to 1st Select position. before installing the chains or the
Do not slip the clutch. wheel caps can be damaged by the
When ready to start, press accelerator chain bands.
pedal and slowly release the clutch
pedal simultaneously. When the vehicle
starts to move, gradually release the EXAMPLE Stuck vehicle
parking brake. If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or
60G089S
sand, follow the directions below:
On wet roads, you should drive at a lower
WARNING 1) Shift the transaxle back and forth
speed than you do on dry roads due to
between a forward range (or first gear
Do not hold the brake pedal down too possible slippage of tires during braking.
for manual transaxle) and reverse. This
long or too often while going down a When driving on icy, snow-covered or
will create a rocking motion which may
steep or long hill. This could cause muddy roads, reduce your speed and
give you enough momentum to free the
the brakes to overheat, resulting in avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking,
vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator
reduced braking efficiency. Failure to or sharp steering movements.
to keep wheel spinning to a minimum
take this precaution could result in wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the
loss of vehicle control. Tire chains accelerator while shifting.
Tire chains should only be used if they are Do not race the engine. Excessive
needed to increase traction or are required wheel spin will cause the tires to dig
NOTICE by law. Check that the chains you use are deeper, making it more difficult to free
the correct size for your vehicles tires. the vehicle.
When descending a downhill, Never Also check that there is enough clearance
turn the ignition key to LOCK posi- 2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few
between the fenders and the chains as minutes of rocking, we recommend you
tion or press the engine switch to installed on the tires.
change the ignition mode to LOCK to consult an authorised Maruti Suzuki
(OFF). Emission control system dam- Install the chains on the front tires tightly, workshop or a roadside assistance ser-
age may result. according to the chain manufacturers vice. If a towing service is not available
instructions. Retighten the chains after in an emergency, your vehicle may be

4-4

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

temporarily towed by other vehicle with Driving on wet roads


a towing cable or chain secured to the WARNING
towing hook either on the front of the EXAMPLE
vehicle or on the rear of the vehicle. In addition to following the driving
Refer to Frame hooks in OTHER tips in this section, it is important to
observe the following precautions.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT sec- Check that your tires are in good
tion. condition and always maintain the
specified tire pressure. Refer to
WARNING Tires in the INSPECTION AND
Do not allow anyone to stand near MAINTENANCE section for
the vehicle when you are rocking it, details.
and do not spin the wheels faster Do not use tires other than those
specified by MARUTI SUZUKI.
than an indicated 40 km/h on the Never use different sizes or types
speedometer. Personal injury and/or of tires on the front and rear
vehicle damage may result from spin- wheels. For information regarding
82PHM04001
ning the wheels too fast. the specified tires, refer to the tire
NOTICE information label located on the
drivers door lock pillar.
NOTICE When driving on wet roads, avoid Never use oversized tires or spe-
Do not continue rocking the vehicle driving through large amount of cial shock absorbers and springs
for more than a few minutes. Pro- standing water on the road. Large to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
longed rocking can cause engine amount of water entering the will change the handling character-
overheating or transaxle damage. engine compartment may cause istics. Oversized tires may also rub
damage to the engine and or elec- against the fender over bumps,
trical components. causing vehicle damage or tire fail-
If stuck in deep water, do not start ure.
the engine. After driving through water, test the
Water is incompressible substance, brakes while driving at a slow
water inside engine is harmful to speed to see if they have main-
the engine. tained their normal effectiveness. If
the brakes are less effective than
normal, dry them by repeatedly
applying the brakes while driving
slowly until the brakes have
regained their normal effective-
ness.

4-5

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Off-road driving Dos and Donts for safe 3) Before moving, look around your vehi-
cle to confirm safety.
Do not drive in the field covered driving 4) Dont accelerate suddenly, since it is
with grown grass Exercise care in handling your vehicle. Be dangerous and wastes fuel.
If you drive in the field covered with grass, conscious of not only your own safety but
it may cause unexpected accident or vehi- also the safety of others on the road, and General Driving
thus enjoy the best and most comfortable 1) Be sure to stop before a stop light or
cle damage by getting caught in grown stop sign. When moving into an inter-
grass. driving experience.
section without any traffic lights or
Following are basic rules for safe driving. signs, drive slowly to confirm safety.
Read them carefully for good understand- 2) Always follow other vehicles at a safe
ing of the content so that you can enjoy distance in order to prevent a rear-end
safe and pleasant driving in your vehicle. collision, in case the vehicle ahead
makes a sudden stop.
Starting
1) Adjust the drivers seat for the proper
driving posture. EXAMPLE
2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to
obtain the best possible rear view.

EXAMPLE

72F-08-008

3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30


meters before making a turn or chang-
ing the lane so as not to be hit.
72F-08-001 4) Before entering a corner, decelerate to
a safe speed. Dont apply brakes during
cornering, or skidding may occur.

4-6

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

5) When overtaking other vehicles, watch Braking


out for oncoming vehicles and carefully EXAMPLE
ensure safety. EXAMPLE
6) Dont attempt zigzag driving as it will
hinder your control over the vehicle and
may cause an accident.
7) Avoid reckless high speed driving and
try to drive at a safe speed suitable for
the road conditions while maintaining a
constant speed.
8) The higher the speed, the narrower the
drivers visual range becomes. In such
a state, it is difficult to anticipate any
hazard and the driver feels fatigued.
72F-08-012

EXAMPLE Use foot brake in three stages


1. Warn the vehicle behind you.
2. Gradually apply the brake.
3. Bring the vehicle to a halt.
3) When driving downhill, try not to apply
72F-08-011 the brake but use the engine brake
1) Use the parking brake when parking effectively. Overuse of the foot-brake
your vehicle and shift the gear shift may result in reduction of brake effec-
lever into the first gear or reverse gear tiveness.
position for the sake of safety. Long Distance Driving
2) Dont use hand-braking unless 1) Be sure to perform safety checks
unavoidable. It causes the vehicle to before starting a trip.
72F-08-015
skid and a collision may occur. It is 2) Take rest at regular intervals to prevent
especially dangerous when the tyres accidents which may occur due to feel-
9) Do not attempt sharp handling during are worn out as they skid more. ing sleepy or tired.
high speed driving. You may lose your
control over your vehicle.
10)When overtaking or changing lanes
while driving at a high speed, keep
ample vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

4-7

56RH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Night Time Driving Margin for safety


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE It is important to allow yourself a margin for
safety during driving so that you can cope
with erroneous or unexpected driving of
other drivers. For that, observe the follow-
ing.
Drive at a safe speed.
Maintain a sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Dont force yourself to overtake other
vehicles.
Dont accelerate suddenly, steer sharply
or stop suddenly.
72F-08-020 72F-08-021
Keep ample gaps between driving
1) Drive at lower speeds during the night 3) Dont use headlights on high beam schedules.
than in the daytime, as the visual range unless its use is inevitable. It may Observe traffic rules and regulations.
is restricted at night. cause visual impairment to the driver of
2) Avoid overtaking other vehicles at night. the oncoming vehicle or the vehicle Conclusion
ahead of you, which may cause an A perfect driver does not exist. The
Darkness bothers your sense of speed
accident. endeavour of every motorist should be to
and hinders your judgment of vehicle-
4) Always keep the window glasses clean. strive for perfection. Safety consciousness
to-vehicle distance.
Dont operate the windshield wiper not only ensures your safety and the safety
when the windshield glass is dry else of other road users, it also helps reduce
the wiper blade and glass may get the wear and tear on your vehicle, length-
damaged. ens its life, gives better fuel efficiency and
ensures a comfortable driving experience.
Follow the dos and donts listed, and
driving will never be the same again.

4-8

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT


Fuel filler cap ....................................................................... 5-1
Engine hood ........................................................................ 5-2
Sun visor .............................................................................. 5-3
Interior light ......................................................................... 5-4
Accessory socket ................................................................ 5-6
AUX/USB socket (if equipped) ........................................... 5-7
Assist grips .......................................................................... 5-7
Glove box ............................................................................. 5-7 5
Cup holder and storage area ............................................. 5-8
Footrest (if equipped) ......................................................... 5-10
Floor mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-10
Luggage compartment board ............................................ 5-11
Frame hooks ........................................................................ 5-11
Heating and air conditioning system ................................ 5-13
Manual heating and air conditioning system ................... 5-16
Automatic heating and air conditioning system
60G407
(climate control) ................................................................... 5-21
Radio antenna ..................................................................... 5-28
Installation of radio frequency transmitters ..................... 5-28
Audio system (if equipped) ................................................ 5-29

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel filler cap A fuel filler cap is located on the left rear
side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can EXAMPLE
be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever (3)
EXAMPLE located on the outboard side of the drivers
seat and locked by simply closing the door. (1)
(1)
(2)

Open Close

52RM50030
56RH00501
NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (2) by hooking the groove (3) when refuel-
57L51093 ing.
To remove the fuel filler cap:
1) Stop the engine and close all doors and To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
windows while refueling. 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
2) Open the fuel filler door. several clicks.
3) Remove the cap by turning it counter- 2) Close the fuel filler door.
clockwise.
WARNING
CAUTION Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The smoke when refueling, and check
fuel may be under pressure and may that there are no open flames or
spray out, causing injury. sparks in the area.
56RH00502

5-1

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Engine hood 2) Push the under-hood release lever


WARNING sideways with your finger, as shown in
the illustration. While pushing the lever,
If you need to replace the fuel cap, EXAMPLE lift up the engine hood.
use a MARUTI genuine cap. Use of an
improper cap can result in a malfunc-
tion of the fuel system or emission
CAUTION
control system. It may also result in The release lever and its peripheral,
fuel leakage while driving and in the or engine hood can be hot enough to
event of an accident. burn your finger right after driving.
Touch after it becomes cool enough.

NOTICE
Check that the wiper arms are not
56RH00504 raised before you lift up the engine
hood to avoid damaging the wiper
To open the engine hood: arms and the engine hood.
1) Pull the hood release handle located on
the outboard side of the drivers side of
the instrument panel. This will disen- EXAMPLE
gage the engine hood lock halfway.

EXAMPLE

56RM05008

3) While holding the hood, pull the prop


56RH00505 rod out from the holding clip, and then

5-2

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

insert the end of the rod into the desig- 2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above Sun visor
nated hole. the hood latch, and then let it drop
down. Check that the hood is securely EXAMPLE
CAUTION latched after closing.
The prop rod can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after driving.
WARNING
Touch the rod after it becomes cool Check that the hood is fully closed
enough. and latched before driving. If it is not,
Insert the end of the rod into the it can fly up unexpectedly during
hole securely. If the rod slips out, driving, obstructing your view and
you may get caught in the closing resulting in an accident.
hood.
The rod may slip out when the
hood is blown by wind. Be careful CAUTION
on windy days. To avoid injury, check that no part of
79J161
the occupants body such as hands
To close the engine hood: or head is in the path of the hood The sun visors can be pulled down to block
1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the when closing it. glare coming through the windshield, or
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod they can be unhooked and turned to the
back into the holding clip. side to block glare coming through the side
NOTICE window.
EXAMPLE Pressing the hood from the top may
damage it. NOTICE
When unhooking and hooking a sun
visor, handle it by the hard plastic
parts or the sun visor can be dam-
aged.

56RM05007

5-3

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Card holder (if equipped) Vanity mirror (if equipped) Interior light
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(2)

(1)

(2)
(1)
EXAMPLE
74LHT0516 74LHT0532

(1) Card holder (2) Vanity mirror

You can put a card in the card holder (1) on There is a vanity mirror (2) on the back of
the back of the sun visor. the sun visor.

NOTICE WARNING (3)

When you park your vehicle outdoors Do not use the mirror while driving
in direct sunlight or in hot weather, your vehicle or else you may lose
do not leave plastic cards in the control of the vehicle.
holder. The heat may distort them. When using the vanity mirror, do
56RM05009
not move too close to a front air
bag location or lean against it. If (1) Front (if equipped)
the front air bag is accidentally (2) Center
inflated, it could hit you hard. (3) Trunk lid (if equipped)

5-4

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front (if equipped) (1) ON (a) If you perform any of the following proce-
EXAMPLE The light comes on and stays on regard- dures before the light fading out, the light
less of whether the door is open or closed. will start to fade out immediately.
Inserting the ignition key into the ignition
NOTE: switch or pressing the engine switch to
If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless change the ignition mode to ACC or
push start system or the keyless entry sys- ON.
tem, the light will automatically be turned Locking all doors by operating the key,
off to prevent the battery from discharging keyless entry transmitter, keyless push
when the following conditions are simulta- start system remote controller, power
(c) (b) (a) neously met: door locking switch or request switch.
The ignition switch is in LOCK position,
OFF (c)
or the ignition mode is LOCK (OFF). The light remains off even when the door is
The hazard warning lights, the position opened.
56RH00509
lights and the headlights are off.
After about 15 minutes of the light on. Trunk lid (if equipped) (3)
Center (2)
DOOR (b) EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE The light comes on while any of the
(c) (b) (a)
doors is opened. After closing all doors,
the light will remain on for about 15 sec-
onds and then fade out.
If all doors are closed, the light comes on
for about 15 seconds when the ignition
key is pulled out from the ignition switch
or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode from ON to
LOCK (OFF). After 15 seconds, the
light will fade out.
To save the battery, the light will be auto-
matically turned off when a period of 15 56RH00510
61MM0A107 minutes has elapsed after any of the
These light switches have three positions doors is opened and other operations When you open the trunk lid, the trunk light
which function as described below: are not done. comes on and remains on as long as you
keep the lid open.

5-5

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE: Accessory socket The accessory socket will work when the
If you leave trunk lid open, the light will ignition switch is in ACC or ON position,
automatically be turned off after about 15 Center console or the ignition mode is ACC or ON.
minutes to prevent the battery from dis- Each socket can be used to provide 12
charging. volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electri-
cal accessories when used alone. Check
EXAMPLE that the cap remains on the socket when
the socket is not in use.

NOTICE
Use of inappropriate electrical acces-
sories can cause damage to your
vehicles electrical system. Check
that any electrical accessories you
use are designed to plug into this
EXAMPLE type of socket.
56RH00512

Floor console (if equipped)


WARNING
56RH00511
EXAMPLE
NOTE: If you pay too much attention to
The number of doors involved in the light- operating the Accessory socket
ing operation of the interior light depends while driving, an accident can
on the vehicle specification. If there is a occur.
switch (rubber protrusion) at the door
opening as shown, the door is involved in
the lighting operation. The trunk lid is not
involved in this operation.

56RM05002

5-6

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AUX/USB socket (if equipped) Assist grips Glove box


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

56RH00514 56RM05006 56RH00515

Connect your portable digital music player, Assist grips are provided for convenience. To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.
etc. to this socket to enjoy music through To close it, push the lid until it latches
the vehicles audio system. Refer to Audio NOTICE securely.
system (if equipped) in this section.
To avoid damaging the assist grip
and the molded headlining, do not
WARNING
NOTICE hang down the assist grip. Never drive with the glove box lid
Always close the rubber cap when open. It could cause injury if an acci-
not in use, since entry of foreign dent occurs.
material, dust, water, conductive liq-
uids may damage the audio system
or USB device.

WARNING
If you pay too much attention to
operating the AUX/USB socket while
driving, an accident may occur.

5-7

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Cup holder and storage area Center console tray (1)


WARNING
EXAMPLE
Do not place any objects which may
fall out from the tray when the vehicle
(6) (7) is moving.
(3) Failure to take the precaution may
(4) result in an object interfering with the
pedals and causing a loss of vehicle
control or an accident.

(5)
(1) (2) (6)
(3)

56RH00516

(1) Center console tray (2) Front cup holders


(3) Front bottle holder (4) Rear cup holder (if equipped)
(5) Front seat back pocket (if equipped) (6) Rear bottle holder
(7) Rear armrest with cup holders
(if equipped)

5-8

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front cup holders (2) / Front bottle holder (3) / Rear armrest with cup holders
Rear cup holder (if equipped) (4) Rear bottle holder (6) (if equipped) (7)
Use the rear cup holder to put a cup with a You should only place a bottle with a cap in
lid or a bottle with a cap. Also, you can put the holder. EXAMPLE
small articles in the rear cup holder.
Front seat back pocket
WARNING (if equipped) (5)
Failure to take the precautions listed
below could cause personal injury or
vehicle damage.
Be careful when you are using the
cup holders to hold a cup contain-
ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liq-
uid can cause burn injury. (1)
Do not use the cup holders to hold
sharp-edged, hard or breakable 56RH00559
objects. Objects in the cup holders
may be thrown about during a sud- (1) Cup holders
den stop or impact, and could
cause personal injury. The rear armrest is stowed in the center of
EXAMPLE the seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.
Be careful not to spill liquid or
56RH00560
insert any foreign materials into the
moving part of the gearshift lever, This pocket is provided for holding light
or any electrical components. Liq- and soft things such as gloves, newspa-
uid or foreign materials may dam- pers or magazines.
age these parts.
CAUTION
Do not put hard or breakable objects
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.
can injure the occupants in the rear
seat.

5-9

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Footrest (if equipped) Floor mats (if equipped)


WARNING
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Failure to take the following precau-
tions may result in the drivers side
floor mat interfering with the pedals
and causing a loss of vehicle control
or an accident.
Check that the floor mat grommets
are hooked to the fasteners.
Never place additional floor mats
on top of the existing floor mat.

(1)

56RM05001 68LM554

Use the footrest (1) as a support for your To prevent the drivers side floor mat from
left foot and body. sliding forward and possibly interfering with
the operation of the pedals, MARUTI genu-
ine floor mats are recommended.
Whenever you put the drivers side floor
mat back in the vehicle after it has been
removed, hook the floor mat grommets to
the fasteners and position the floor mat
properly in the footwell.
When you replace the floor mats in your
vehicle with a different type such as all-
weather floor mats, we highly recommend
to use MARUTI genuine floor mats for
proper fitting.

5-10

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Luggage compartment board Frame hooks Front


It is not recommend that you use the frame EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE hooks for towing another vehicle. They
were originally designed to tow your vehi-
(2) cle in emergency situation.
If your vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, refer to Towing in EMER-
GENCY SERVICE section.

WARNING
Observe the following instructions
when using frame hooks. The towing (1)
hook or vehicle body may break and
(1) cause serious injury or damage: 56RH00519

56RH00554
Do not use the frame hooks for The towing hook (1) is provided on the
towing another vehicle. front of the vehicle for use in emergency
When installing the luggage compartment Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out situations and sea shipping purposes only.
board, please hook the grommets (1) of of severe snowy, muddy or sandy
the board on the hook (2) of the vehicle. conditions, sudden starts or erratic To install the hook (1), follow the procedure
driving maneuvers which could below.
cause excessive stress on the tow-
ing hook. EXAMPLE
In such case, we recommend that
you contact a professional service.
1

56RM05011

5-11

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle 4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn it
(A) and wheel wrench (B) from the lug- EXAMPLE clockwise by using a wheel wrench (B)
gage compartment. until the hook (1) is securely installed.

EXAMPLE (C) To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the


installation procedure.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
never use the towing hook (1) for
trailer / train shipping.
(1)
Rear
(A) 56RH00555
EXAMPLE
3) Screw in the towing hook (1) by hand.
56RH00557
NOTE:
2) Remove the cover (C) from front It is recommend to secure the cover with
bumper by using a jack handle (A) cov- tape to prevent damage during towing.
ered with a soft cloth as shown in the
illustration. (B) EXAMPLE (2)
NOTE: (1)
Do not use excessive force as it may dam-
age the cover strap.

56RH00520

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear


of the vehicle for use in emergency situa-
tions and sea shipping purposes only.

56RH00556

5-12

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTICE
When you use the frame hook (2),
avoid the driving that gives signifi-
cant physical shock on hook. Such
operation can damage the hook, the
vehicle body or the drive system.
Do not accelerate suddenly.
Do not tow the vehicle heavier than
your vehicle.

To tow your vehicle on the road or high-


way, follow the instruction of Towing in
EMERGENCY SERVICE section.

5-13

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Heating and air conditioning Air outlet


system
There are two types of heating and air con- (1)
ditioning systems as follows: (2)
Manual heating and air conditioning sys-
tem
Automatic heating and air conditioning (3)
system (climate control)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(5)

(6)
(5)

EXAMPLE
56RH00521

(1) Windshield defroster outlet


(2) Side defroster outlet
(3) Side outlet
(4) Center outlet
(5) Floor outlet
(6) Rear outlet (if equipped)

5-14

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Center outlet Side outlet


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1) (1)
(1) (2)

56RM05005

56RM05003 Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,


to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally, to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
The side outlet opens when you turn the
dial (2) upward and closes when you turn it
downward.

5-15

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Rear outlet (if equipped)


EXAMPLE CAUTION
Prolonged exposure to hot air from
the heater or air conditioner could
result in low temperature burns. All
vehicle occupants, particularly chil-
dren, the elderly, those with special
needs, individuals with delicate skin,
and sleeping individuals, should
maintain sufficient distance from the
air outlets to prevent prolonged
exposure to hot airflow.

(3) (4) (3)


56RH00524

Move the knob (3) vertically or horizontally


to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
The rear outlet opens when you turn the
dial (4) to the right and closes when you
turn it to the left.

NOTE:
The airflow from the rear outlet can be
increased by fully moving the center outlet
knob (1) to the inner side.

5-16

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Manual heating and air conditioning system (1) Temperature selector


(2) Air conditioning switch
Description of controls (3) Blower speed selector
(4) Air flow selector
EXAMPLE (5) Air intake selector

(4) (3) (2) (1)

(5)

56RH00525

5-17

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature selector (1) Air flow selector (4) VENTILATION (a)


This is used to adjust the temperature.
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(c)
Air conditioning switch (2)
To turn on the air conditioning system, set
the blower speed selector to a position
other than off and push in A/C switch. (b) (d)
With this A/C switch operation, an indica-
tor light will come on when the air condi-
tioning system is working. To turn off the
air conditioning system, push A/C switch
again. (a) (e)
During operation of the air conditioner, you
may notice slight changes in engine
speed. These changes are normal, the 68PM00533 56RH00526
system is designed so that the compressor This selector is used to select the following Temperature-controlled air comes out of
turns on or off to maintain the desired tem- mode. the center, side and rear (if equipped) out-
perature. lets.
Less operation of the compressor results BI-LEVEL (b)
in better fuel economy.
EXAMPLE
Blower speed selector (3)
This is used to turn on the blower and to
select blower speed.

56RH00527

5-18

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature-controlled air comes out of HEAT & DEFROST (d) Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out the windshield defroster outlets, the side
of the center, side and rear (if equipped)
EXAMPLE defroster outlets and the side outlets.
outlets. When the temperature selector (1)
is in the fully cold position or fully hot posi- Air intake selector (5)
tion, however, the air from the floor outlets EXAMPLE
and the air from the center, side and rear
(if equipped) outlets will be the same tem-
perature. (f) (g)
HEAT (c)
EXAMPLE
56RH00531

This selector is used to select the following


56RH00529 modes.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of RECIRCULATED AIR (f)
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster When this mode is selected by moving the
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the lever to left, outside air is shut out and
side outlets. inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-
DEFROST (e) able when driving through dusty or polluted
air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting
EXAMPLE to quickly cool down the interior.
56RH00528 FRESH AIR (g)
Temperature-controlled air comes out of When this mode is selected by moving the
the floor outlets and the side outlets, also lever to right, outside air is used.
comes out of the windshield defroster out- NOTE:
lets and also comes slightly out of the side If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an
defroster outlets. extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,
you should occasionally select FRESH
AIR.

56RH00530

5-19

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

System operating instructions Head cooled/Feet warmed heating NOTE:


Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an
Natural ventilation temperature selector to the desired tem- extended period of time, the air in the
Select VENTILATION and FRESH AIR, the perature position, and the blower speed vehicle can become contaminated and
temperature selector to the desired tem- selector to the desired blower speed posi- the windows tend to get misted. There-
perature position, and the blower speed tion. Unless the temperature selector is in fore, you occasionally select FRESH
selector to off. Fresh air will flow through the fully cold position or fully hot position, AIR whenever possible.
the vehicle during driving. the air that comes out of the center, side If your vehicle has been left in the sun
Forced ventilation and rear (if equipped) outlets will be cooler with the windows closed, it will cool
The base settings are the same as for nat- than the air that comes out of the floor out- faster if you open the windows briefly
ural ventilation except you set the blower lets. while you operate the air conditioner with
speed selector to a position other than off. the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and
Normal cooling the blower at high speed.
Normal heating (using outside air) Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION,
Select HEAT and FRESH AIR, the tem- the temperature selector to the desired tem- Dehumidifying
perature selector to the desired tempera- perature position and the blower speed Set the air flow selector to a desired air
ture position and the blower speed selector selector to the desired blower speed posi- flow selector position, the temperature
to the desired blower speed position. Set- tion, and turn on A/C switch. Setting the selector to the desired temperature posi-
ting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed selector to a higher blower tion and the blower speed selector to the
blower speed position increases heating speed position increases cooling efficiency. desired blower speed position. Also select
efficiency. You can switch the air intake selector to FRESH AIR and turn on A/C switch.
Quick heating (using recirculated air) either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED
The base settings are the same as for nor- AIR as you desire. Choosing RECIRCU- NOTE:
mal heating except you select RECIRCU- LATED AIR increases cooling efficiency. Because the air conditioner dehumidifies
LATED AIR. If you use this heating method the air, turning it on will help keep the win-
Quick cooling (using recirculated air) dows clear, even when blowing heated air
for an extended period of time, the air in The base settings are the same as for nor-
the vehicle can become contaminated and using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST
mal cooling except you select RECIRCU- functions.
the windows can become misty. Therefore, LATED AIR and the highest blower speed.
use this method only for quick heating and
change to the normal heating method as
soon as possible.

5-20

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Maintenance
EXAMPLE If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
56RH00532
in Maintenance schedule in INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE section.
NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting: NOTE:
select DEFROST and FRESH AIR, Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
set the blower speed selector to high, refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
adjust the temperature selector to the R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around
hot end, 1993 for automotive applications. Other
turn on A/C switch, and refrigerants are available, including recy-
adjust the side outlets so the air blows cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
on the side windows. in your vehicle.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning sys-
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrig-
erants.

5-21

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Automatic heating and air conditioning system (1) Temperature selector


(2) Blower speed selector
(climate control) (3) Air intake selector
(4) Air flow selector
Description of controls (5) Defrost switch
(6) Air conditioning switch
EXAMPLE (7) OFF switch
(8) AUTO switch
(9) Display

(2) (5) (9) (6) (1)

(4) (8) (7) (3)

56RH00533

5-22

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature selector (1) Blower speed selector (2) Air intake selector (3)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(a)
(3)
(1) (2)

(b)

56RH00534 56RH00535 56RH00536

Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust The blower speed selector (2) is used to Push the air intake selector (3) to change
the temperature. turn on the blower and to select blower between the recirculated air and fresh air
speed. mode.
If AUTO switch (8) is pushed, the blower If AUTO switch (8) is pushed, the air
speed will vary automatically as the cli- intake will vary automatically as the climate
mate control system maintains the control system maintains the selected tem-
selected temperature. perature.

NOTE:
When the recirculated air mode is
selected, the automatic operation system
is deactivated even if you push AUTO
switch (8).

5-23

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

RECIRCULATED AIR (a) Air flow selector (4) VENTILATION (c)


When this mode is selected, outside air is EXAMPLE
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This (c) EXAMPLE
mode is suitable when driving through
dusty or polluted air such as a tunnel, or
when attempting to quickly cool down or
warm up interior. (d)

FRESH AIR (b)


When this mode is selected, outside air is (e)
introduced.

FRESH AIR and RECIRCULATED AIR are (4)


selected alternately each time the air (f)
intake selector is pushed.
56RH00537 56RH00526
NOTE: Push the air flow selector (4) to change Temperature-controlled air comes out of
If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an among the following functions. The indica- the center, side and rear outlets.
extended period of time, the air in the vehi- tion of the selected mode appears in the
cle can become contaminated and the win- display.
dows tend to get misted. Therefore, you
should select FRESH AIR whenever possi- If AUTO switch (8) is pushed, the air flow
ble. will vary automatically as the climate con-
trol system maintains the selected tem-
perature.

5-24

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

BI-LEVEL (d) HEAT (e) HEAT & DEFROST (f)


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

56RH00527 56RH00528 56RH00529

Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out the floor outlets and the side outlets, a the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
of the center, side and rear outlets. When small amount of air comes out of the wind- outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
the temperature selector (1) is in the fully shield defroster outlets and also comes side outlets.
cold position or fully hot position, however, slightly out of the side defroster outlets.
the air from the floor outlets and the air
from the center, side and rear outlets will
be the same temperature.

5-25

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Defrost switch (5) DEFROST Air conditioning switch (6)


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (6) (1)

(5)

(8) (7)

56RH00538 56RH00530 56RH00540

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the Temperature-controlled air comes out of
The air conditioning switch (6) is used to
defroster. the windshield defroster outlets, the side
turn on and off the air conditioning system
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
only when the blower is on. To turn on the
air conditioning system, push in the switch
NOTE:
and A/C will appear in the display. To turn
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to
off the air conditioning system, push in the
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning
switch again and A/C will go off.
system will operate and FRESH AIR mode
will be selected automatically. In very cold
weather, however, the air conditioning sys-
tem will not operate.

5-26

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

System operating instructions NOTE: If your vehicle has been left in the sun
When the recirculated air mode is with the windows closed, it will cool
Automatic operation selected, the automatic operation system faster if you open the windows briefly.
EXAMPLE (6) (1) is deactivated even if you push AUTO Even under the automatic operation, you
switch (8). can set individual selectors to the manual
mode. The manually selected functions
You can use the air conditioning switch (6) are maintained, and the other functions
to manually turn the air conditioner on or remain under automatic operation.
off according to your preference. When If the windshield and/or the front door
you turn the air conditioning switch off, the windows are fogged, push the defrost
climate control system cannot lower the switch (5) to turn on the defroster, or
inside temperature below outside tempera- push the air flow selector (4) to change
ture. the air flow to HEAT & DEFROST posi-
To turn the climate control system off, push tion to defog the windows.
(8) (7) OFF switch (7). To return the blower speed selector (2),
air intake selector (3), and air flow selec-
56RH00540 NOTE: tor (4) to automatic operation, push
You can let the climate control system work If AUTO in the display blinks, there is a AUTO switch (8).
automatically. To set the system for fully-auto- problem in the heating system and/or air
matic operation, follow the procedure below. conditioning system. You should have the
system inspected by an authorised Maruti
1) Start the engine. Suzuki workshop.
2) Push AUTO switch (8).
3) Set the desired temperature by turning NOTE:
the temperature selector (1). To find the temperature at which you are
most comfortable, start with the 25C
The blower speed, air intake and air flow
(75F) setting.
are controlled automatically to maintain the
If you turn the temperature selector (1)
set temperature. However, the air flow is
until HI or LO appears on the display,
not changed to DEFROST position auto-
the climate control system will operate at
matically.
maximum heating or cooling and the
blower will run at full speed.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather
or hot air in hot weather, the system will
delay turning on the blower until warmed
or cooled air is available.

5-27

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Manual operation Maintenance


EXAMPLE You can manually control the climate con- If you do not use the air conditioner for a
trol system. Set the selectors to the long period, such as during winter, it may
desired positions. not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
EXAMPLE mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
(11) Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
(10) and helps protect the internal components.
If you air conditioner is equipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
56RH00541
in Maintenance schedule in INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE section. Have
Be careful not to cover the interior tem- this job done by an authorised Maruti
perature sensor (10) located between the Suzuki workshop as the lower glove box
steering wheel and the climate control must be lowered for this job.
panel, or the sunlight sensor (11) located 56RH00532

at the top of the drivers side dashboard. NOTE: NOTE:


These sensors are used by the automatic If you need maximum defrosting: Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
system to regulate temperature. push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
defroster (the air conditioning system will R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around
operate and FRESH AIR mode will be 1993 for automotive applications. Other
selected automatically), refrigerants are available, including recy-
set the blower speed selector to high, cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
adjust the temperature selector to HI in your vehicle.
indication on the display, and
adjust the side outlets so the air blows NOTICE
on the side windows.
Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning sys-
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrig-
erants.

5-28

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Radio antenna Installation of radio frequency


transmitters
EXAMPLE We recommend that you always ask an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop about
frequency band, max output power,
antenna position of vehicle and specific
conditions for installation and/or use before
installing a radio transmitter in your vehi-
cle. Such equipments may cause the elec-
tronic control system to malfunction if they
are incorrectly installed or they are not
suited for the vehicle.

63J055

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-


able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-
terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn
it clockwise firmly by hand.

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the radio
antenna:
Remove the antenna when using an
automatic car wash.
Remove the antenna when the
antenna hits anything such as a
low ceiling in a parking garage or
putting a car cover over your vehi-
cle.

5-29

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Audio system (if equipped)

EXAMPLE

56RH00542
AM/FM CD PLAYER

NOTE:
For vehicle equipped with SMARTPLAY INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM, refer to the audio manual available with the vehicle.

5-30

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Safety information Notes on discs


Precautions Removing the disc Proper way to hold
the compact disc
WARNING When the inside of the vehicle is very
cold and the player is used soon after
If you pay too much attention to switching on the heater, condensation
operating the audio system or may form on the compact disc (CD) or
watching the audio system display the optical parts of the player and proper
while driving, an accident can playback may not be possible. If conden-
occur. If you set the sound volume sation forms on the disc, wipe it off with a
too loud, it could prevent you from soft cloth. If condensation forms on the
being aware of road and traffic con- optical parts of the player, do not use the
ditions. player for about one hour. This will allow EXAMPLE
Keep your eyes on the road and the condensation to disappear normally. 52D275
your mind on the drive. Avoid pay- Driving on extremely bumpy roads which
ing too much attention to operat- To remove the compact disc from its stor-
cause severe vibrations may cause age case, press down on the center of the
ing the audio system or watching sound to skip when playing a CD.
the audio system display. case and lift the disc out, holding it care-
This unit uses a precision mechanism. fully by the edges.
Familiarize yourself with the audio Even in the event that trouble arises,
system controls and operation of never open the case, disassemble the
the audio system before driving. Always handle the compact disc by the
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts. Bring edges.
Preset your favorite radio stations the unit to an authorised Maruti Suzuki
before driving so that you can Never touch the surface.
workshop.
quickly tune to them using the
presets. Cautions on handling
Set the sound volume to a level
that will allow you to continue to EXAMPLE
be aware of surrounding road and
traffic conditions while driving.
(A)
EXAMPLE
52D274 52D347

This unit has been designed specifically for To remove fingermarks or dust, use a soft
playback of compact discs bearing mark cloth, and wipe in a straight line from the
(A) shown above. center of the compact disc to the edge.
No other discs can be played.

5-31

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE


(B)
(B)
(C)

52D349 52D351

Do not use any solvents such as commer- Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray, light or any heat source.
or thinner to clean compact discs.
52D277
NOTE:
EXAMPLE Do not use commercially available CD
New discs may have some roughness protection sheets or discs equipped with
around the edges. The unit may not work stabilizers, etc.
or the sound may skip if such discs are These may get caught in the internal
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to mechanism and damage the disc and
remove the roughness (C) from edges of the mechanism.
the disc before inserting it into the unit. It may be impossible to play CD-R discs
52D350 with this unit due to the recording format.
EXAMPLE Do not use compact discs that have large CD-RW discs cannot be played with this
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. unit.
Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating prop-
erly.

52D348

Never affix labels on the surface of the


compact disc or write on the surface with a
pencil or pen.

5-32

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

WARNING
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
This is a class I laser product. Use registered trademarks and are owned by
of controls or adjustments or perfor- the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.
mance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth
hazardous radiation exposure. ready device whenever requested.
Do not open covers and do not This unit shares the communication fre-
attempt to repair this unit by your- quency with other private or public wireless
self. communication equipment such as a wire-
Ask an authorised Maruti Suzuki less LAN and other wireless communica-
workshop for the repair. tion radios.
You should stop using this unit whenever
you are notified that your unit disturbs
other wireless communication immediately.

5-33

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Basic operations Turning on/off power


Press VOL PUSH PWR knob (1) to turn
EXAMPLE on the power. The unit starts to operate in
the previous setting that the power was
turned off.

Adjusting the volume


Turn VOL PUSH PWR knob (1).
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning it counterclockwise decreases the
volume.

NOTE:
For the purposes of safe driving, adjust the
audio volume to a level that allows you to
hear sounds outside of the vehicle includ-
ing car horns and particularly emergency
vehicle sirens.
(2) (1)

56RH00543

(1) VOL PUSH PWR knob


(2) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob

5-34

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con- Preset-EQ


1) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND trol) Preset-EQ calls up various sound types in
knob (2). The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function accordance with the listening music type.
Each time the knob is pressed, sound automatically adjusts (increases/ 1) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
adjustment will change as follows: decreases) the sound volume in accor- knob (2) several times until PRESET-
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control EQ appears.
is provided with three selectable levels 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume (2).
Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)
adjustment increases together with the Each time the knob is turned, preset
LEVEL number. EQ mode will change as follows:
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)
1) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)
is selected. OFF (FLAT)
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)
(2) to select the desired AVC adjust- JAZZ
ment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL 2)
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)
ROCK
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)
POP

CLASSIC
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(2) to adjust the sound. HIP-HOP

5-35

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to the radio Display


(A)
EXAMPLE

(B)
68LM561

(1) FM button
(3) (1) (2) AM button
(3) UP button
(4) (2) (4) DOWN button
(5) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(7) (6) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
(7) AS button

(5) (A) Band


(B) Frequency

(6)

56RH00544

5-36

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting the FM band Preset memory Auto store mode on/off


Press the FM button (1). 1) Select the desired station. Press AS button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the recep- 2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6]) Each time the button is pressed, the mode
tion band will change as follows: of PRESET buttons (6) to which you will change as follows:
want to store the station for 2 seconds
or longer.
FM1 FM2 AS mode on AS mode off
Auto store
Hold down AS button (7) for 2 seconds or
longer.
6 stations in good reception will automati-
cally be stored to PRESET buttons (6) in
Selecting the AM band order, starting from a station whose fre- Radio reception
Press the AM button (2). quency is the lowest. Radio reception can be affected by envi-
ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
Seek tuning NOTE: signals power and distance from the sta-
Press UP button (3) or DOWN button (4). Auto store can be cancelled by pressing tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may
The unit stops searching for a station at a AS button (7) while auto store search- interfere or deflect radio reception, causing
frequency where a broadcast station is ing is ongoing. poor reception. Poor reception or radio
available. When auto store is performed, the sta- static can also be caused by electric cur-
tion previously stored in the memory in rent from overhead wires or high voltage
Manual tuning each position will be overwritten. power lines.
Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (5). When there are fewer than 6 stations
The frequency being received is displayed. that can be stored even if 1 round of
auto store operation is performed, no
station will be stored at the remaining
PRESET buttons (6).
6 stations can be preset for FM1 and
FM2 in common, and 6 stations for AM
in auto store mode.

5-37

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to a CD Display
(A)
EXAMPLE

(1) (B)
(2) (3)
(1) Insertion slot
(4) (2) EJECT button
(3) CD button
(5) (4) UP button
(5) DOWN button
(6) RPT button
(7) RDM button
(8) DISP button

(A) Track number


(B) Play time

NOTE:
This product does not support 8 cm CD
(8) (6) (7) (sometimes called as mini single CD, 3-
inch CD, CD3, etc.).

56RH00545

5-38

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

EXAMPLE NOTICE NOTICE


Never insert your finger or hand If you forcefully try to push an
into the CD insertion slot. Never ejected CD inside the unit before auto
(A) insert foreign objects. reloading, the disc surface might be
Never insert a CD with glue coming scratched.
out from adhesive tape or a rental Before reloading a CD, remove it
52D274 CD label or with a trace indicating from the unit completely.
CDs or CD-ROMs without mark (A) can- that adhesive tape or a rental CD
not be used. label has been removed. This may Listening to a CD
Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RW cause the CD not to eject or result When a CD is inserted, playback will auto-
format may sometimes be impossible to in a malfunction. matically start.
use. When a CD is already inside the unit,
Loading a CD press CD button (3) to start playback.
EXAMPLE Insert a CD in the insertion slot (1).
When the CD is loaded, it starts to play. Selecting a track
Press UP button (4) to listen to the next
Ejecting a CD track.
Press EJECT button (2). Press DOWN button (5) twice to listen to
When the ignition switch is in LOCK posi- the previous track.
52D291
tion or the engine switch is in LOCK When DOWN button (5) is pressed
(OFF) mode, the CD remained ejected for once, the track currently being played
A CD is to be inserted with its label side around 15 seconds or longer will automati- will start from the beginning again.
up. cally be drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload
When there is a CD already in the unit, it function) Fast forwarding/rewinding a track
is impossible to insert another CD with- The backup eject function: Hold down UP button (4) to fast forward
out ejecting the CD in the unit. Do not This function allows you to eject a CD by the track.
use force to insert a CD into the CD pressing EJECT button (2) even when the Hold down DOWN button (5) to fast
insertion slot. ignition switch is in LOCK position or the rewind the track.
engine switch is in LOCK (OFF) mode.

5-39

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Random playback Display change


Press RDM button (7). Press DISP button (8).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows:

OFF TRACK RANDOM Play time

Disc title

Track title
TRACK RANDOM
The random indicator RDM will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be NOTE:
played in random order. NO TITLE will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
Repeat playback being played.
Press RPT button (6). If text data contains more than 16 char-
Each time the button is pressed, the mode acters, > mark will appear at the right
will change as follows: end. Holding down DISP button (8) for
1 second or longer can display the next
page.

OFF TRACK REPEAT

TRACK REPEAT
The repeat indicator RPT will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-40

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC disc Display


(A) (B)
EXAMPLE

(D) (C)

(2) (1) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob


(2) UP button
(3) (3) DOWN button
(4) RPT button
(5) RDM button
(6) DISP button

(1) (A) Folder number


(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(D) File type

(6) (4) (5)

56RH00546

5-41

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting a folder Random playback Repeat playback


Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (1) Press RDM button (5). Press RPT button (4).
to select a folder. Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: will change as follows:
Selecting a track
Press UP button (2) to listen to the next
track.
Press DOWN button (3) twice to listen to OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
the previous track.
When DOWN button (3) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
FOLDER RANDOM FILE REPEAT
The random indicator F.RDM will light. The repeat indicator RPT will light.
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track
The tracks in the current folder will be The track currently being played will be
Hold down UP button (2) to fast forward
the track. played in random order. played repeatedly.
ALL RANDOM FOLDER REPEAT
Hold down DOWN button (3) to fast
rewind the track. The random indicator RDM will light. The repeat indicator F.RPT will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be All tracks in the currently selected folder
played in random order. will be played repeatedly.

5-42

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display change Notes on MP3/WMA/AAC Points to remember when making MP3/


Press DISP button (6). WMA/AAC files
Each time the button is pressed, display What is MP3? Common
will change as follows: An abbreviation of MPEG audio layer3, High bit rate and high sampling fre-
MP3 is an audio compression format quency are recommended for high qual-
that has become the standard format ity sounds.
Play time among PC users. Its merit is that the Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
original audio data is compressed to recommended. Selecting VBR may
Folder name approximately 1/10 and high sound qual- cause display of incorrect playing time
ity is maintained. This means that it is and jumpiness of playback.
File name possible to store the data of approxi- Playback sound quality varies depend-
mately 10 music CDs on a single CD-R/ ing on the encoding environment. For
Album name (MP3, AAC only) RW disc, which in turn makes it possible details, refer to the user manual of the
to play music for a long time without hav- encoding software and the writing soft-
Track title ing to change the disc. ware in use.
What is WMA?
Artist name An abbreviation of Windows Media NOTICE
Audio, WMA is an audio compression
format developed by Microsoft. Never use .mp3, .wma or .m4a
WMA files for which the DRM (Digital as a file name extension if it is not in
NOTE: the MP3/WMA/AAC format file. Fail-
NO TITLE will be displayed when there Rights Management) function is on can-
not be played. ure to observe this may result in
is no text information in the disc currently damage to the speaker due to noise
being played. Windows MediaTM and the Windows
production.
If text data contains more than 16 char- logo are trademarks or registered trade-
acters, > mark will appear at the right marks of Microsoft Corporation in the
end. Holding down DISP button (6) for United States and other countries.
1 second or longer can display the next What is AAC?
page. An abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Coding, AAC is an audio compression
format used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

5-43

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD Compression formats


media
MP3
It is recommended not to write both CD-
Bit rate:
DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a
disc. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
files are on the same disc, tracks may MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
not be played in the correct order or Sampling frequency:
some tracks may not be played at all. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/
When storing both MP3 data and WMA 48 kHz
data on the same disc, sort and place MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/
them in different folders. 24 kHz
Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/ MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/
AAC files and unnecessary folders on a 12 kHz
disc.
MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
to meet the standards and the file sys- Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
tem specifications as shown below. Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
The file extension .mp3, .wma or * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
.m4a should be assigned to files based not supported.
on their format independently.
You may encounter a trouble in playing AAC*
MP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor- Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
mation of MP3/WMA/AAC files depend- Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
ing on the writing software or CD * Apple Lossless is not supported.
recorder in use.
This unit does not have a playlist func- Supported file systems
tion. ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo
It is recommended to write discs in Disc-
at-Once mode even though Multi-ses- Maximum number of files/folders
sion mode is supported. These modes Maximum number of files: 512
are the methods for writing audio data in Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
CD. Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)

5-44

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to files stored in a USB device Display


(A) (B)
EXAMPLE

(D) (C)

(1) MEDIA button


(3) (2) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(3) UP button
(4) (4) DOWN button
(1) (5) RPT button
(6) RDM button
(7) DISP button

(2) (A) Folder number


(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(D) File type

(7) (5) (6) NOTICE


Do not connect any USB device other
than a USB memory or a USB audio
player. Do not connect multiple USB
devices to the USB connector using a
56RH00547 USB hub, etc. Supplying power to
multiple USB devices from the con-
nector could cause overheating and
smoking.

5-45

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting USB mode Random playback FOLDER REPEAT


Press MEDIA button (1). Press RDM button (6). The repeat indicator F.RPT will light.
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode All the tracks in the folder currently
will change as follows: will change as follows: selected will be played repeatedly.

Display change
USB (iPod) (if equipped) Press DISP button (7).
OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM Each time the button is pressed, display
Bluetooth audio (if equipped) will change as follows:

AUX (if equipped)


FOLDER RANDOM Play time
The random indicator F.RDM will light.
Selecting a folder The tracks in the currently selected Folder name
Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (2) folder will be played in random order.
to select the desired folder. ALL RANDOM File name
The random indicator RDM will light.
Selecting a track The tracks in the connected USB device Album name (MP3, AAC only)
Press UP button (3) to listen to the next will be played in random order.
track. Track title
Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to Repeat playback
the previous track. Press RPT button (5). Artist name
When DOWN button (4) is pressed Each time the button is pressed, the mode
once, the track currently being played will change as follows:
will start from the beginning again. NOTE:
NO TITLE will be displayed when there
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track is no text information in the disc currently
Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT being played.
the track. If text data contains more than 16 char-
Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast acters, > mark will appear at the right
rewind the track. end. Holding down DISP button (7) for
1 second or longer can display the next
FILE REPEAT page.
The repeat indicator RPT will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-46

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Notes on USB device USB device connection Compression formats


When connecting a USB device, make
Compatible USB devices MP3
sure that it is properly connected to the
USB mass storage class Bit rate:
USB port.
For details as to whether your USB Do not leave the USB device for long MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
memory/USB audio is compatible with periods of time inside the vehicle where MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
USB mass storage class, please contact the temperature can rise too high. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
the USB memory/USB audio manufac- Back up any important data beforehand. Sampling frequency:
turer. We cannot accept responsibility for any MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
USB standard compatibility 1.1/2.0 full lost data. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHz
speed It is recommended not to connect a USB MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz
File system FAT12/16/32, VFAT device that contains data files other than
Maximum current less than 1.0 A MP3/WMA/AAC format. WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
If devices such as USB hub, extension Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
cable are connected to the audio sys- Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
tem, it may not be recognized. In such USB device * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
case, connect the USB device directly to Playback or display may not be possible not supported.
the audio system. depending on the type of USB device in
Devices such as MP3 player/mobile use or the condition of the recording. AAC*
phone/digital camera may not be recog- Depending on the connected USB mem- Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
nized by the audio system for playing ory, the files may be played in different Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
music. order from the stored one. * Apple Lossless is not supported.

Maximum number of files/folders


Maximum number of files: 2500
Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)

5-47

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to an iPod Display


(A)
EXAMPLE

(B) (C)

(1) MEDIA button


(3) (2) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(3) UP button
(4) (4) DOWN button
(7) (5) (6) (1) (5) RPT button
(6) RDM button
(7) DISP button
(8) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
(2)
(A) Track title
(B) Track number
(C) Play time

(8)

56RH00548

5-48

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting iPod mode Random playback Display change


Press MEDIA button (1). Press RDM button (6). Press DISP button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows: will change as follows:

USB (iPod) (if equipped) Album name /


OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM Track title
Bluetooth audio (if equipped)
Track title /
AUX (if equipped) Play time
SONG RANDOM Playlist name /
The random indicator RDM will light. Track title (Playlist mode only)
Selecting a track The tracks in the iPod will be played in
Press UP button (3) to listen to the next random order. Artist name /
track. ALBUM RANDOM Track title
Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to The random indicator F.RDM will light.
the previous track. The albums in the iPod will be played in
When DOWN button (4) is pressed random order.
once, the track currently being played NOTE:
will start from the beginning again. If text data contains more than 16 charac-
Repeat playback
ters, > mark will appear at the right end.
Press RPT button (5).
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track Holding down DISP button (7) for 1 sec-
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward ond or longer can display the next page.
will change as follows:
the track.
Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
rewind the track.
OFF SONG REPEAT

SONG REPEAT
The repeat indicator RPT will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-49

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Playing mode selection Notes on iPod * Apple is not responsible for the opera-
1) Press the button numbered [1] of PRE- Supported iPod tion of this device or its compliance with
SET buttons (8). iPod touch (6th generation) safety and regulatory standards.
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob iPod touch (5th generation)
(2). iPod touch (4th generation) iPod connection
Each time the knob is turned, the mode iPod touch (3rd generation) Make sure to detach the iPod after
will change as follows: iPod touch (2nd generation) turning the ignition switch to LOCK
iPod touch (1st generation) position or pressing the engine switch to
PLAYLIST iPod classic change the ignition mode to LOCK
iPod nano (7th generation) (OFF). The iPod may not be shut down
ARTIST iPod nano (6th generation) when it is being connected and may
iPod nano (5th generation) result in battery depletion.
ALBUM iPod nano (4th generation) Do not connect iPod accessories such
iPod nano (3rd generation) as an iPod remote control or head-
SONGS iPod nano (2nd generation) phones while connecting the iPod with
iPod nano (1st generation) the unit. The unit may not operate cor-
PODCAST iPod (5th generation) rectly.
iPhone 6S Plus
GENRE iPhone 6S
iPhone 6 Plus
AUDIOBOOK iPhone 6
iPhone 5S
iPhone 5C
3) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND iPhone 5
knob (2) to select the desired mode. iPhone 4S
NOTE: iPhone 4
When the button numbered [1] of PRE- iPhone 3GS
SET buttons (8) is pressed, the previous iPhone 3G
mode will be displayed. iPhone
* Some functions may not be available
depending on the model of iPod.
* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
* iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other coun-
tries.

5-50

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AUX function AUX connection


To listen to auxiliary audio sources (sold
EXAMPLE separately) through the unit, follow the
instruction below.
1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to
the AUX/USB socket (separately
attached) with an AUX cable.
2) Press MEDIA button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the
mode will change as follows:

USB (iPod) (if equipped)

Bluetooth audio (if equipped)


(1)
AUX (if equipped)

CAUTION
Before connection, mute the unit,
and also keep the volume of the
auxiliary audio source within a
range that will not cause distortion.
When the audio source is turned
off, noise may be emitted. Be sure
to turn off the unit or switch to
56RH00549 another mode before turning off the
(1) MEDIA button audio source.

5-51

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE:
Please consult your place of purchase
for details about whether a given auxil-
iary audio source can be connected and
the proper auxiliary cord to use.
The volume and tone controls of the
auxiliary audio source can be adjusted
on the unit.
In AUX mode, the volume setting is dif-
ferent from another mode.

5-52

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Bluetooth hands-free (if equipped) Steering switch

(10) EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(9)

(7)
(5) (4)
(8)
(6)
(1) (2) 52RM50460

(6) Bluetooth setup button (on steering


wheel)
(7) OFF HOOK button
(8) ON HOOK button
(9) MUTE switch
(3) (10) VOLUME knob

56RH00550

(1) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob


(2) VOL PUSH PWR knob
(3) PRESET buttons
(4) BACK button
(5) Bluetooth setup button (on control panel)

5-53

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Phone registration 6) When the pairing with the phone is Adjusting the listening volume
established, automatic transfer of the Turn VOL PUSH PWR knob (2) during
To use the hands-free function with this phonebook and the call history a call.
unit, it is required to register the phone becomes selectable. The automatic Turning it clockwise increases the vol-
in advance. transfer starts with Yes and it does not ume; turning it counterclockwise
with No. decreases the volume.
NOTE: 7) Press ON HOOK button (8). Press VOLUME knob (10) during a call.
Up to 5 phones can be registered. Pressing the knob to + side increases
To set up a new phone, disconnect the NOTE: the volume; pressing the knob to - side
audio player from the unit. Connect the When selecting Go Back or pressing decreases the volume.
audio player again after phone setup is BACK button (4), the previous menu will
completed if necessary. be displayed. Adjusting the ring volume
When attempts to establish the pairing When registering an additional phone, Turn VOL PUSH PWR knob (2) while a
fail within 60 seconds, the connecting repeat Step from 1). call is coming in.
operation will be canceled. Try to estab- Turning it clockwise increases the vol-
lish the pairing again or refer to the man- Receiving a call ume; turning it counterclockwise
ual of the phone in use for how to Press OFF HOOK button (7) to receive a decreases the volume.
establish the pairing with the phone. call. Press VOLUME knob (10) during a call.
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) Pressing the knob to + side increases
or (6). Ending a call the volume; pressing the knob to - side
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- Press ON HOOK button (8) to end a call. decreases the volume.
played.
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Rejecting a call (only for supported Adjusting the call or ringtone volume
(1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and models) Follow the instructions below to adjust the
press the knob (1) to determine the Press ON HOOK button (8) to reject a call or ringtone volume.
selection. incoming call. 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob or (6).
Mute of hands-free microphone
(1) to select Pairing, and press the The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
knob (1) to determine the selection. Press MUTE switch (9) to mute the micro-
played.
4) Select My Car from the Bluetooth phone. To cancel the mute, press MUTE
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
menu of the phone and establish the switch (9) again.
(1) to select Setup Telephone, and
pairing. press the knob (1) to determine the
Refer to the manual of the phone in use selection.
for further information. 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit (1) to select Sound Setting, and press
to the phone. the knob (1) to determine the selection.

5-54

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Missed Calls, Incoming Calls or press the knob (1) to determine the
(1) to select Call Volume or Ringtone Outgoing Calls respectively. selection.
Volume, and press the knob (1) to 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
determine the selection. (1) to select the desired number, and (1) to select Delete History, and press
The current call or ringtone volume will press the knob (1) to determine the the knob (1) to determine the selection.
be displayed. selection. 5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select Missed Calls, Incoming
(1) to select the desired call or ringtone (1) to select Dial, and press the knob Calls, or Outgoing Calls, and press
volume, and press the knob (1) to (1) or OFF HOOK button (7) to dial to the knob (1) to determine the selection.
determine the selection. the selected number. 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(1) to select a number to be deleted or
NOTE: NOTE: ALL, and press the knob (1) to deter-
When selecting Go Back or pressing When selecting Go Back or pressing mine the selection.
BACK button (4), the previous menu will BACK button (4), the previous menu will 7) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
be displayed. be displayed. (1) to select Delete? or Delete All?,
Pressing Confirm after selecting Add and press the knob (1) to determine the
Dialing using missed/incoming/ Speed Dial can register the selected selection.
outgoing calls number in the speed dial. 8) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Follow the instructions below to dial to the Pressing Confirm after selecting (1) to select Confirm, and press the
previously dialed number again. Delete can delete the selected number knob (1) to complete the deletion.
from the call history.
NOTE: NOTE:
Up to 30 phone numbers of the latest calls Deletion of call history When selecting Go Back or pressing
can be stored. (30 calls including missed, Follow the instructions below to delete a BACK button (4), the previous menu will
received and dialed call) missed/incoming/outgoing call history. be displayed.
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
1) Press OFF HOOK button (7).
or (6). Registration in Phonebook
The Bluetooth phonebook menu will
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- Follow the instructions below to register
be displayed. played. phone numbers in the Phonebook of the
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob unit.
(1) to select All Calls, Missed Calls, (1) to select Setup Telephone, and 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls, press the knob (1) to determine the or (6).
and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
selection. 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob played.
To dial from the dialed history or the (1) to select Setup Phonebook, and 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
received history, select All Calls,
(1) to select Setup Telephone, and

5-55

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

press the knob (1) to determine the The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. played. selection.
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(1) to select Setup Phonebook, and (1) to select Setup Telephone, and (1) to select A.Transfer, and press the
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection. selection. 4) Pressing TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob knob (1) switches between A.transfer
(1) to select Add Contacts, and press (1) to select Call History, and press On and A.transfer Off.
the knob (1) to determine the selection. the knob (1) to determine the selection. 5) Selecting Go Back or pressing the
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob BACK button (4) stores displayed set-
(1) to select Overwrite All or Add One (1) to select Overwrite Call History?, ting and the previous menu is dis-
Contact, and press the knob (1) to and press the knob (1) to determine the played.
determine the selection. selection.
Rewrite All (MAX1000): Ok? or Rest 5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Making a call by phonebook
of Memory XXXX: Ok? will be dis- (1) to select Confirm, and press the Follow the instructions below to dial a num-
played. knob (1) to transfer the call history from ber registered in phonebook.
6) Press or turn TUNE/FLD PUSH the phone. 1) Press OFF HOOK button (7).
SOUND knob (1) to select Confirm, The Bluetooth phonebook menu will
and press the knob (1) to determine the NOTE: be displayed.
selection. When selecting Go Back or pressing 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
7) Transfer contacts from the phone. BACK button (4), the previous menu will (1) to select Phonebook, and press
When the registration is completed, the be displayed. the knob (1) to determine the selection.
Setup Phonebook will be displayed. 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Automatic transfer of phonebook/call (1) to select the initial of the name you
NOTE: history would like to make a call, and press the
When selecting Go Back or pressing You can select whether or not the device knob (1) to determine the selection.
BACK button (4), the previous menu will transfers the phonebook and the call his- The registered numbers will be dis-
be displayed.
tory automatically when the phone is regis- played in sequence. If names have
Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in tered. been registered together with numbers,
Phonebook.
Follow the instructions below to select. the names will be displayed.
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Transfer of call history (Call History)
or (6). (1) to select the name you would like to
Follow the instructions below to transfer
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- make a call, and press the knob (1) to
call history of the registered phone.
played. determine the selection.
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
or (6). (1) to select Setup Telephone, and (1) to select Dial, and press the knob

5-56

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

(1) or OFF HOOK button (7). and press the knob (1) to determine the The registered numbers will be dis-
The displayed number or the number selection. played in sequence. If names have
registered with the displayed name will 7) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob been registered together with numbers,
be dialed. (1) to select Confirm, and press the the names will be displayed.
knob (1) to complete the deletion. Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Deletion of registered data (Delete (1) to select the name you would like to
NOTE: register in speed dial, and press the
Entry)
When selecting Go Back or pressing knob (1) to determine the selection.
Follow the instructions below to delete a
BACK button (4), the previous menu will 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
number registered in phonebook.
be displayed.
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) (1) to select Choose Preset, and
or (6). press one of PRESET buttons (3) to
Registration in speed dial
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- which the selected number is to be
Follow the instructions below to assign a assigned. If a number is already
played.
number to one of PRESET buttons (3) to assigned to the selected button, a con-
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
use as the speed dial. firmation message will be displayed.
(1) to select Setup Telephone, and
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. or (6). (1) to select a confirmation message,
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- and press the knob (1) to complete the
(1) to select Setup Phonebook, and played. assignment.
press the knob (1) to determine the 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
selection. (1) to select Setup Telephone, and (1) to select Confirm, and press the
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob press the knob (1) to determine the knob (1) to complete the assignment.
(1) to select Delete Contacts, and selection. When the assignment is completed, the
press the knob (1) to determine the 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Setup Phonebook will be displayed.
selection. (1) to select Setup Phonebook, and
press the knob (1) to determine the NOTE:
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
selection. When selecting Go Back or pressing
(1) to select the initial of the name you
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob BACK button (4), the previous menu will
would like to delete or ALL, and press
(1) to select Add Speed Dial, and be displayed.
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. One-touch call (Speed dial)
(1) to select the name you would like to
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Follow the instructions below to dial the
delete, and press the knob (1) to deter-
(1) to select the initial of the name you number assigned to each of the PRESET
mine the selection.
would like to register in speed dial, and buttons (3).
6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
press the knob (1) to determine the 1) Press OFF HOOK button (7).
(1) to select Delete? or Delete All?,
selection. The Bluetooth phonebook menu will

5-57

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

be displayed. 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Reset to the factory defaults
Pressing one of PRESET buttons (3) (1) to select Confirm, and press the Follow the instructions below to reset all
can skip step 2) and the 1st line of step knob (1) to complete the deletion. the settings to the factory defaults.
3). 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
NOTE:
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob or (6).
When selecting Go Back or pressing
(1) to select Speed Dials, and press The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
the knob (1) to determine the selection. played.
be displayed.
3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3). 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
The assigned number will be displayed. (1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and
Display of device data (Device Name)
If no number is assigned, No Entry is press the knob (1) to determine the
Follow the instructions below to display the
displayed. selection.
BD (Bluetooth Device) address and
4) Press OFF HOOK button (7). 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
The selected number will be dialed. device name. (1) to select Initialize, and press the
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) knob (1) to determine the selection.
Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial) or (6). 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Follow the instructions below to delete the The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- (1) to select All Initialize, and press
number assigned for the speed dial. played. the knob (1) to determine the selection.
1) Press OFF HOOK button (7). 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
The Bluetooth phonebook menu will (1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and (1) to select All Initialize, and press
press the knob (1) to determine the
be displayed. the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection.
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(1) to select Speed Dials, and press (1) to select Confirm, and press the
(1) to select Bluetooth Info, and press
the knob (1) to determine the selection. knob (1) to start the reset.
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3) to
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob NOTE:
which the number to be deleted is
(1) to select Device Name or Device When selecting Go Back or pressing
assigned.
Address, and press the knob (1) to dis- BACK button (4), the previous menu will
If the number is not registered, No
play the device name or the BD (Blue- be displayed.
Entry is displayed.
tooth Device) address.
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(1) to select Delete, and press the NOTE:
knob (1) to determine the selection. When selecting Go Back or pressing
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob BACK button (4), the previous menu will
(1) to select Del Speed Dial, and be displayed.
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.

5-58

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selection of phone (Select Phone) List of phones (List Phones) 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Follow the instructions below to select a Follow the instructions below to display the (1) to select Passkey, and press the
phone to be paired with from the registered names of the registered phones in knob (1) to determine the selection.
phones. sequence. 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) (1) to select Enter New Passkey, and
or (6). or (6). press the knob (1) to determine the
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- selection.
played. played. 5) Press or turn TUNE/FLD PUSH
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob SOUND knob (1) to select Confirm.
(1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and (1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select a number for the first digit,
selection. selection. and press the knob (1) to determine the
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob selection. Select and determine num-
(1) to select List Phone, and press the (1) to select List Phone, and press the bers for the second, third and fourth
knob (1) to determine the selection. knob (1) to determine the selection. digits in order in the same manner.
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob The names of the registered phones When not entering up to the eighth
(1) to select a phone to be paired with, are displayed in sequence. digit, enter blanks for the successive
and press the knob (1) to determine the digits.
selection. NOTE: 7) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob When selecting Go Back or pressing knob (1) to determine the passkey set-
(1) to select Select, and press the BACK button (4), the previous menu will ting.
knob (1) to determine the selection. be displayed.
NOTE:
NOTE: Passkey setting (Set Passkey) When selecting Go Back or pressing
When selecting Go Back or pressing Follow the instructions below to set the BACK button (4), the previous menu will
BACK button (4), the previous menu will security number (passkey). be displayed.
be displayed. 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
The Bluetooth ready audio device will or (6).
be disconnected when the phone is The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
selected. played.
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.

5-59

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Deletion of phone information (Delete BT function on/off (BT Power)


Phone) Follow the instructions below to turn on/off
Follow the instructions below to delete the the Bluetooth function.
registered phone information. 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5)
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (5) or (6).
or (6). The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- played.
played. 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and
(1) to select Setup Bluetooth, and press the knob (1) to determine the
press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection. 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select BT Power, and press the
(1) to select List Phone, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob knob (1) to select BT Power On or BT
(1) to select a phone to be deleted, and Power Off.
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. NOTE:
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob When the BT function is turned off, the
(1) to select Delete, and press the connection between this unit and the
knob (1) to determine the selection. registered phone in use will be discon-
6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob nected.
(1) to select Delete?, and press the When selecting Go Back or pressing
knob (1) to determine the selection. BACK button (4), the previous menu will
7) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob be displayed.
(1) to select Confirm, and press the
knob (1) to determine the selection.
NOTE:
When selecting Go Back or pressing
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
be displayed.

5-60

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Bluetooth audio (if equipped) Steering switch


EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(3) (8)
(4)
52RM50470
(7) (1) Display
(A)
(2)

(B)
(1) MEDIA button
(5) (6) (2) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
(5) DISP button
(6) BACK button
56RH00551 (7) Bluetooth setup button (on control
panel)
(8) Bluetooth setup button (on steering
wheel)
(A) Track number
(B) Play time

5-61

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Registration of audio devices NOTE: Fast forwarding/rewinding a track


When selecting Go Back or pressing Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward
To use Bluetooth ready audio devices BACK button (6), the previous menu will the track.
with this unit, it is required to register the be displayed. Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
devices. When registering additional audio rewind the track.
devices, repeat Step from 1).
NOTE:
NOTE: Some functions may not be available
To set up a new audio player, disconnect Selecting Bluetooth audio mode
depending on Bluetooth audio.
the phone from the unit. Connect the Press MEDIA button (1).
phone after audio player setup is com- Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: Display change
pleted if necessary. Press DISP button (5).
When attempts to establish the pairing Each time the button is pressed, display
fail within 60 seconds, the connecting USB (iPod) (if equipped) will change as follows:
operation will be canceled. Try to estab-
lish the pairing again or refer to the audio Bluetooth audio (if equipped)
player manual for assistance with the
pairing process. Play time
AUX (if equipped)
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (7)
or (8). Track name
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- Selecting a group (only for supported
played. models) Artist name
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob (2)
(2) to select Setup Bluetooth, and to select a group. Album name
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection. Selecting a track NOTE:
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob Press UP button (3) to listen to the next If text data contains more than 16 charac-
(2) to select Pairing, and press the track. ters, > mark will appear at the right end.
knob (2) to determine the selection. Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to Holding down DISP button (5) for 1 sec-
4) Select My Car from the Bluetooth the previous track. ond or longer can display the next page.
menu of the audio player and establish When DOWN button (4) is pressed
the pairing. once, the track currently being played
Refer to the manual of the audio player will start from the beginning again.
in use for further information.
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit
to the audio player.

5-62

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selection of audio device (Select Audio) List of audio devices (List Audio) 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
Follow the instructions below to select an Follow the instructions below to display the (2) to select Passkey, and press the
audio device to be paired with from the names of the registered audio devices in knob (2) to determine the selection.
registered audio devices. sequence. 4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (7) 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (7) (2) to select Enter New Passkey, and
or (8). or (8). press the knob (2) to determine the
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- selection.
played. played. 5) Press or turn TUNE/FLD PUSH
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob SOUND knob (2) to select Confirm.
(2) to select Setup Bluetooth, and (2) to select Setup Bluetooth, and 6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
press the knob (2) to determine the press the knob (2) to determine the (2) to select a number for the first digit,
selection. selection. and press the knob (2) to determine the
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob selection. Select and determine num-
(2) to select List Audio, and press the (2) to select List Audio, and press the bers for the second, third and fourth
knob (2) to determine the selection. knob (2) to determine the selection. digits in order in the same manner.
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob The names of registered audio devices When not entering up to the eighth
(2) to select an audio device to be will be displayed in sequence. digit, enter blanks for the successive
used, and press the knob (2) to deter- digits.
mine the selection. NOTE: 7) Press TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob When selecting Go Back or pressing knob (2) to determine the passkey set-
(2) to select Select, and press the BACK button (6), the previous menu will ting.
knob (2) to determine the selection. be displayed.
NOTE:
NOTE: Passkey setting (Set Passkey) When selecting Go Back or pressing
When selecting Go Back or pressing Follow the instructions below to set the BACK button (6), the previous menu will
BACK button (6), the previous menu will security number (Passkey). be displayed.
be displayed. 1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (7)
The phone will be disconnected when or (8).
the Bluetooth ready audio device is The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis-
selected. played.
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(2) to select Setup Bluetooth, and
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.

5-63

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Deletion of audio device information Disclaimer for Bluetooth function Remote audio controls
(Delete Audio) Depending on compatibility of mobile (if equipped)
Follow the instructions below to delete the phone models, no Bluetooth function Controlling basic functions of the audio
registered audio device information. can be used, or some Bluetooth func- system is available using the switches on
1) Press the Bluetooth setup button (7) tions may be restricted. the steering wheel.
or (8). Connectivity or voice quality may get
The Bluetooth setup menu will be dis- affected depending on circumstances. EXAMPLE
played. After the ignition switch is turned to ON
2) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob position or the engine switch is pressed
(2) to select Setup Bluetooth, and to change the ignition mode to ON, the (1) (3) (4)
press the knob (2) to determine the audio system takes few seconds to
selection. detect and connect to the Bluetooth (4)
3) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob device (if already paired).
(2) to select List Audio, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
4) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob
(2) to select an audio device to be (2)
deleted, and press the knob (2) to
determine the selection.
5) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob 56RH00552
(2) to select Delete, and press the Adjusting the volume
knob (2) to determine the selection. To increase the volume, hold down the
6) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob VOLUME knob (1) to + side. The vol-
(2) to select Delete?, and press the ume will continue to increase until the
knob (2) to determine the selection. switch is released.
7) Turn TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob To decrease the volume, hold down the
(2) to select Confirm, and press the VOLUME knob (1) to - side. The vol-
knob (2) to complete the deletion. ume will continue to decrease until the
NOTE: switch is released.
When selecting Go Back or pressing To mute the sound, press the switch (2).
BACK button (6), the previous menu will
be displayed.

5-64

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting the mode Selecting the radio station (AM, FM1,


Press the MODE switch (3). FM2, DAB1, DAB2 mode)
Each time the switch is pressed, the mode To select the next preset station, press
will change as follows: > of the switch (4) only for a moment.
To select the previous preset station,
press < of the switch (4) only for a
AM (Radio)
moment.
To scan a higher frequency radio station,
FM1 (Radio)
press > of the switch (4) for 1 second
or longer.
FM2 (Radio)
To scan a lower frequency radio station,
press < of the switch (4) for 1 second
CD
or longer.
Bluetooth audio (if equipped)
Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod),
Bluetooth audio mode)
AUX (if equipped)
To skip to the next track, press > of the
switch (4) only for a moment.
USB (iPod) (if equipped)
To skip to the previous track, press < of
the switch (4) twice only for a moment.
When the switch (4) is pushed down
It is possible to turn on the audio system
once only for a moment, the track cur-
by pressing the switch (3).
rently being played will start from the
beginning again.

Fast forwarding/rewinding a track


To fast forward a track, press > of the
switch (4) for 1 second or longer.
To fast rewind a track, press < of the
switch (4) for 1 second or longer.

5-65

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Anti-theft feature The anti-theft function is intended to dis-


courage thefts. For example, when the
EXAMPLE audio system is installed in another vehi-
cle, it will become unable to operate.
This function works by entering a Personal
Identification Number (PIN).
When the unit is disconnected from its
power source, such as when the audio
system is removed or the battery is discon-
nected, the unit will become inoperable
(3) until the PIN is reentered.

Setting the anti-theft function


1) Press VOL PUSH PWR knob (1) to
power off.
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]
and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and
(4) (1) press VOL PUSH PWR knob (1).
SECURITY will be displayed.
3) Press UP button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2)
simultaneously.
4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
(2) as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -
[4] of PRESET buttons (2).
5) Hold down TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
knob (4) for 1 second or longer to set
the anti-theft function.
56RH00553 NOTE:
(1) VOL PUSH PWR knob Take a note of the registered PIN and keep
(2) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6]) it for the future use.
(3) UP button
(4) TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND knob

5-66

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Canceling the anti-theft feature Confirming the Personal Identification


To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the Number (PIN)
registered PIN. When the main power source is discon-
1) Press VOL PUSH PWR knob (1) to nected such as when the battery is
power off. replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] to operate the unit again.
and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and 1) Set the ignition switch to ACC position
press VOL PUSH PWR knob (1). or the ignition mode to ON.
PIN ENTRY will be displayed. SECURITY will be displayed.
3) Press UP button (3) and the button 2) Press UP button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2) numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2)
simultaneously. simultaneously.
4) Enter a 4-digit number registered as 3) Enter a 4-digit number registered as
PIN using the buttons numbered [1] - PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -
[4] of PRESET buttons (2). [4] of PRESET buttons (2).
5) Hold down TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND 4) Hold down TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND
knob (4) for 1 second or longer to knob (4) for 1 second or longer.
delete the registered PIN. The indica- When the same PIN as registered is
tion ---- will be displayed and the anti- entered, the power of the audio system
theft function will be canceled. will be turned off automatically and it
will become operable again.
NOTE:
To change your PIN, first delete your cur- NOTE:
rent PIN, and then set a new one. If an incorrect PIN is entered, ERROR
and the total number of incorrect entry
attempts will be displayed.
If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times,
HELP will be displayed and the audio
system will become inoperable.

5-67

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Battery Installation
Install a lithium battery (CR2025) with the poles facing the correct direction. WARNING
Do not expose the battery to
EXAMPLE flame. Do not short circuit, disas-
semble, or heat the battery.
Do not charge the battery.
Use the specified type battery.
Keep the button-shaped battery
away from children to prevent
accidental swallowing.
If the battery is swallowed, contact a
doctor immediately.

CAUTION
Install the battery with the poles
facing the correct direction.
Battery replacement timing When not in use for a long period
When battery power is depleted, the button may not be operable. If the remote control- of time, or if the battery is dead,
ler does not operate, replace the battery and check the operation. remove the battery from the remote
controller.
Caution on battery
Be sure to follow the instructions to prevent battery leakage, over-heating, ignition or If battery leakage has occurred, wipe the
explosion. container first then install a new battery. If
the battery solution contacts the skin, wash
off with water completely.

5-68

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Caution on remote controller


Do not leave the remote controller in an
area exposed to direct sunlight, such as
on the dashboard or steering wheel. The
remote controller may deform because
of the heat, (Be especially careful of the
dashboard exposed to direct sunlight in
the summer, as it will become extremely
hot).
When the vehicle is parked in an area
exposed to direct sunlight, Ensure the
remote controller is placed in an area not
exposed to direct sunlight. For example:
Glove box.
Under direct sunlight, signal reception
from the remote controller weakens. If
this happens, hold the remote controller
close to the signal receptor on the front
panel.

5-69

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Remote controller
common operations

POWER button
Power ON / OFF VOLUME button
Press to adjust volume.
(including at AUX mode)
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
In Sound Mode
Press to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)
In Preset-EQ Mode
The Preset-EQ setting switches as follows: MUTE button
OFF (FLAT) VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +
Press to mute the sound. Press it again to cancel
JAZZ SEEK SEEK
the mute.
TRACK ENT TRACK

ROCK
MODE button 1 MENU
TUNE/FLD
2 3
POP
The mode switches as 4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
CLASSIC follows:
MODE AS SOUND SOUND button
FM1
HIP-HOP While playback, the sound mode switches as
FM2 follows (including at AUX mode, except while
In AVC Mode displaying iPod menu):
CD
The AVC setting switches Preset-EQ
as follows: Bluetooth audio
(if equipped) BASS
OFF
AUX (if equipped) TREBLE
LEVEL 1
USB (iPod) BALANCE
LEVEL 2 (if equipped)
FADER
LEVEL 3 AM
AVC

5-70

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Radio operations

AS button
Press to return to the last received fre-
quency in the previous auto store mode.
Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selects
the stations with the stronger signals and
stores them in order.

VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

SEEK SEEK
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
TRACK ENT TRACK
Press to select the radio station.
TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3

4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP

MODE AS SOUND
PRESET buttons (1-6)
Press to select the desired preset station.

NOTE:
When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will be
stored at the remaining preset buttons.

5-71

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

CD operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button


Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/
RDM (5) button fast-rewind the track.
Press to play the current track randomly.
Press it again to cancel. VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

SEEK SEEK
DISP (6) button
ENT
The display switches as follows:
TRACK TRACK

TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3
Play time

RPT (4) button 4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP Disc title


Press to plays the current track repeatedly. MODE AS SOUND
Track title
Press it again to cancel.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the
next page.

5-72

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

MP3/WMA/AAC Disc operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button


Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-
rewind the track.
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

DISP (6) button


The display switches as follows:
RPT (4) button
Play time
The repeat mode switches as follows:
VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

OFF SEEK SEEK Folder name


TRACK ENT TRACK

FILE REPEAT File name


TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3
FOLDER REPEAT Album name (MP3, AAC only)
4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
Track title
MODE AS SOUND

Artist name
RDM (5) button
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
The random mode switches as follows: page.
OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

5-73

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

USB operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button


Press to skip to the next/previous file.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-
rewind the file.
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

DISP (6) button


The display switches as follows:
RPT (4) button Play time
TUNE/FLD
The repeat mode switches as follows:
VOL - VOL +

Folder name
OFF SEEK
TRACK ENT
SEEK
TRACK
File name
FILE REPEAT TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3 Album name (MP3, AAC only)
FOLDER REPEAT
4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
Track title
MODE AS SOUND

Artist name

RDM (5) button Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.
The random mode switches as follows:
OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

5-74

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

iPod operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button


ENT button Press to skip to the next/previous file.
While displaying iPod menu, press to select the Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-
desired item and display the list. When a track is rewind the file.
selected from the list, the playback starts.

DISP (6) button


TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button The display switches as follows:
While displaying iPod menu, press to dis- Playlist name /
play the next/previous list in the same layer. VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL + Track title (Playlist mode only)
SEEK
TRACK ENT
SEEK
TRACK
Artist name / Track title

Album name / Track title


RPT (4) button TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3
Press to play the current track repeatedly. 4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
Track title / Play time
Press it again to cancel.
MODE AS SOUND
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.

RDM (5) button


The random mode switches as follows:
OFF

SONG RANDOM MENU button


ALBUM RANDOM During playback
Press to display iPod menu.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.
While iPod menu is displayed
Press to display the folder in one layer upper.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

5-75

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Troubleshooting
When encountering a problem, check and follow the instructions below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

Common
When SECURITY is displayed, enter
the PIN.
Unable to operate The security function is on.
When HELP is displayed, contact your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Unable to turn on the power Contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki
Fuse is blown.
(No sound is produced) workshop.

Radio
It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-
High noise Tune it in exactly to the station.
tion.
There may be no station emitting signals
Pick up a station by manual tuning.
powerful enough.
Unable to receive by auto tuning
If AF is on, the unit searches for RDS sta-
Turn off AF.
tions only.

CD

The disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.


Sound skips or noise produced
The disc has a major scratch or is Replace the disc with the one which has
warped. no scratch and warp.

5-76

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

MP3/WMA/AAC
The disc contains unsupported formatted
No playback Check the file format.
data.
Sound skipping may occur when playing
Sound skips or noise produced It is not recommended to play VBR files.
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files.

USB
There is no supported format file to play
Check the file format.
Playback does not start when the USB on this unit.
device is connected The current consumption of the USB Use a USB device with a current con-
device exceeds 1.0 A. sumption lower than 1.0 A.

Bluetooth
The distance between this unit and the
Bluetooth ready device is too far, or a Change the location of the Bluetooth
metallic object may be located between ready device.
the Bluetooth ready device and this unit.
Pairing failed
Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth ready device. (Some devices have the
ready device is off. power saving function that automatically
activates after a certain time.)
Your current location may be out of ser- Drive your vehicle to the service area of
Unable to receive a call
vice area. the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low Another wireless device may be located Switch off the wireless device or keep it
(Distortion, noise etc.) near the unit. away from the unit.

5-77

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Error display messages

Display Possible cause Possible solution

CD
Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.
ERROR 1 The disc cannot be read.
When ERROR 1 does not disappear even when a nor-
mal disc is inserted, contact your dealer.
When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button to
The player developed an error of an
ERROR 3 remove the disc.
unidentified cause.
When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your dealer.

USB/iPod

ERROR 1 The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.

Impossible to communicate correctly with Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
ERROR 2
the USB device. Check the USB device.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
ERROR 3 Inoperable due to an unidentified cause. When ERROR 3 does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
The current consumption of the USB
ERROR 4 Check the USB device.
device exceeds 1.0 A.

5-78

56RH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display Possible cause Possible solution

Bluetooth
Disconnect the Bluetooth ready device and connect it
The player developed an error of an again.
ERROR 1
unidentified cause. When ERROR 1 does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
CONNECTION
Failed to establish pairing or connection Try to establish the pairing or connection again.
FAILED
Delete registered data of unnecessary number in phone-
Reached the limit for the number of phone-
MEMORY FULL book and try to transfer the register phone numbers in
book data in transfer
the phonebook again.

NOT AVAILABLE Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your car.

5-79

56RH0-74E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING


Vehicle loading .................................................................... 6-1
Trailer towing ....................................................................... 6-1

54G215

56RH0-74E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle loading Trailer towing


Your vehicle was designed for specific WARNING Your MARUTI SUZUKI was originally
weight capacities. The weight capacities of Never overload your vehicle. The designed to carry people and a normal
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross gross vehicle weight (sum of the amount of cargo, not to tow a trailer.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the weights of the vehicle, all the occu-
Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW, pants, accessories, cargo plus trailer
front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (front nose weight if towing a trailer) must
and rear) are listed in SPECIFICATIONS never exceed the Gross Vehicle
section. Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
GVWR Maximum permissible overall never distribute a load so that the
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including weight on either the front or rear axle
all the occupants, accessories and cargo exceeds the Permissible maximum
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a Axle Weight (PAW).
trailer).
PAW (front and rear) Maximum permissi- WARNING
ble weight on an individual axle.
Always distribute cargo evenly. To
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and avoid personal injury or damage to
actual loads at the front and rear axles can your vehicle, always secure cargo to
only be determined by weighing the vehi- prevent it from shifting if the vehicle
cle. Compare these weights to the GVWR moves suddenly. Place heavier
and PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi- objects on the floor and as far for-
cle weight or the load on either axle ward in the cargo area as possible.
exceeds these ratings, you must remove Never pile cargo higher than the top
enough weight to bring the load down to of the seat backs.
the rated capacity.

6-1

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE


Maintenance schedule ........................................................ 7-2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2
Drive belt .............................................................................. 7-6
Engine oil and filter ............................................................. 7-6
Engine coolant .................................................................... 7-11
Air cleaner ............................................................................ 7-13
Spark plugs .......................................................................... 7-13
Gear oil ................................................................................. 7-15
Clutch pedal ......................................................................... 7-16
Fuel filter .............................................................................. 7-17
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-17
Steering ................................................................................ 7-19 7
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-19
Battery .................................................................................. 7-23
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-24
Headlight aiming ................................................................. 7-29
60G410
Bulb replacement ................................................................ 7-29
Wiper blades ........................................................................ 7-34
Windshield washer fluid ..................................................... 7-36
Air conditioning system ..................................................... 7-36

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

EXAMPLE WARNING WARNING


(Continued) (Continued)
When the engine is running, keep Keep used oil, coolant, and other
hands, clothing, tools, and other fluids away from children and pets.
objects away from the fan and drive Dispose of used fluids properly;
belt. Even though the fan may not never pour them on the ground,
60B128S
be moving, it can automatically into sewers, etc.
turn on without warning.
WARNING When it is necessary to perform
service work with the engine run-
Take extreme care when working on ning, check that the parking brake
your vehicle to prevent accidental is set fully and the transaxle is in
injury. Carefully observe the follow-
ing precautions: Neutral.
To prevent damage or unintended Do not touch ignition wires or other
activation of the air bag system or ignition system parts when starting
seat belt pretensioner system, check the engine or when the engine is
that the battery is disconnected and running, or you could receive an
the ignition switch has been in electric shock.
LOCK position or the ignition Be careful not to touch a hot
mode has been LOCK (OFF) for at engine, exhaust manifold and
least 90 seconds before performing pipes, muffler, radiator and water
any electrical service work on your hoses.
MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle. Do not Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
touch air bag system components, flames around fuel or the battery.
seat belt pretensioner system com- Flammable fumes are present.
ponents or wires. Do not get under your vehicle if it is
The wires are wrapped with yellow supported only with the portable
tape or yellow tubing, and the cou- jack provided in your vehicle.
plers are yellow for easy identifica- Be careful not to cause accidental
tion. short circuits between the positive
Do not leave the engine running in
garages or other confined areas. and negative battery terminals.
(Continued) (Continued)

7-1

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule Periodic Maintenance


NOTICE
The following table shows the times when Schedule
you should perform regular maintenance Whenever it becomes necessary to C: Clean
on your vehicle. This table shows in kilo- replace parts on your vehicle, it is R: Replace or Change
meters and months when you should per- recommended that you use MARUTI I: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or
form inspections, adjustments, lubrication genuine replacement parts or their replace as necessary
and other services. equivalent. L: Lubricate
T: Tighten to Specified Torque
WARNING O: Rotate
MARUTI SUZUKI recommends that
maintenance on your Maruti Suzuki NOTE:
vehicle should be performed by This table includes services as scheduled
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. up to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000
km, carry out the same services at the
same intervals respectively.

7-2

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST


Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE
1-1. Water pump drive belt (Tension, Wear) Petrol - - - I - I - I - R
1-2. Engine coolant (Level, Leakage) l l l R l R l R l R
1-3. Engine oil, engine oil filter and drain plug gasket (Level, Leakage) I I R R R R R R R R
1-4. Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage) l l l l l l l l l l
1-5. Engine cylinder head bolts Petrol - - T - T - T - T -
1-6. Engine mounting and manifold fixing (Loose Damage) - - I - I - I - I -
1-7. Valve clearance Petrol - - - - I - - I - -
1-8. Exhaust system (Noise, Leakage etc.) - l - l - I - I - l
Positive crank case ventilation system
1-9. Petrol - l - l - I - I - l
(Hoses, Connections and Valve)
1-10. Exhaust gas recirculation valve Diesel - - - - C - - C - -
IGNITION
2-1. Ignition wire (Damage, Deterioration) Petrol - - - l - l - l - l
2-2. Spark plug Petrol - - - - - R - - - R
FUEL
Petrol Clean every 5,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
Paved-road
Diesel Clean every 10,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
3-1. Air cleaner filter element
Dusty Petrol Clean every 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
Condition Diesel Replace more frequently if dust condition is severe.
3-2. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage) - l - - - l - - - l
3-3. Fuel filter (Leakage) Petrol l l l l l R l l l R
3-4. Fuel filter and water draining Diesel I I I R I R I R I R
CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION
4-1. Clutch pedal (Play) Petrol I I I I I I I I I I
4-2. Clutch fluid (Level, Leakage) Diesel l l l R l R l R l R
4-3. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage) l l l l l l l l l l

7-3

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST


Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
4-4. Manual transmission oil (Level, Leakage) I I l l l l l l l l
4-5. Gear shifter (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I
DRIVE SHAFT
5-1. Drive shaft noise I I I I I I I I I I
5-2. Drive shaft boot (Damage) - l l l l l l l l l
BRAKE
6-1. Brake fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R
6-2. Brake pedal (Pedal - carpet clearance) I I I I I I I I I I
6-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
6-4. Brake disc and pad (Wear) - I I I I I I I I I
6-5. Brake drum and shoes (Wear) - - I I I I I I I I

6-6. Master cylinder, wheel cylinder, caliper piston I I I I I I I I I I


(Fluid leakage, Boot/Seal damage)
6-7. Brake hoses and pipes (Fluid leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
WHEEL
7-1. Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Crack and Rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O
7-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
7-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION
8-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
8-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support and Torsion rods (Loose, Damage) - I I I I I I I I I
8-3. Rear spring (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
8-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
8-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) - T T T T T T T T T

7-4

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST


Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
STEERING
9-1. Steering wheel (Play, Loose) I I I I I I I I I I
9-2. All rods and arms (Loose, Damage, Wear) I I I I I I I I I I
9-3. Tilt steering (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I
ELECTRICAL
10-1. Battery - Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) and voltage I I I I I I I I I I
10-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, Damage) - I I I I I I I I I
10-3. Lighting system (Operation, Stains, Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
10-4. Wiper (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I
10-5. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I
10-6. AUX, USB and accessory socket (Operation) - I I I I I I I I I
BODY
11-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) - T T T T T T T T T
11-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L
ROAD TEST
12-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I
12-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I
AIR CONDITIONER
13-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I
13-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt - T T T T T T T T T
13-3. All hose joint (Check, Tighten) I I I I I I I I I I
13-4. Check functioning of recirculating flap I I I I I I I I I I
13-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water - C C C C C C C C C
13-6. Check belt for frayed edges I I I I I I I I I I
13-7. Check all mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I
13-8. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) I I I I R I I R I I

7-5

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Drive belt (For petrol engine model) Engine oil and filter
WARNING (2) (1) Specified oil
When the engine is running, keep (4) (For petrol engine model)
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away (a)
from the moving fan and drive belts.

Check that the drive belt tension is correct


while the engine is stopped. If the belt is
too loose, insufficient battery charging,
engine overheating, poor air conditioning, (3) (5) (1)
or excessive belt wear can result. When
you push the belt with your thumb midpoint EXAMPLE
between the pulleys, there should be a 56RH00701
deflection according to the following chart.
(1) Front (2) Rear
The belts should also be examined to (3) Generator (4) Water pump EXAMPLE
ensure that they are not damaged. (5) Air conditioner compressor 71LST0701
If you need to replace or adjust the belt Drive belt deflection (1) Recommended
have it done by an authorised Maruti (100 N (10 kg, 22 lbs) press)
Suzuki workshop. (a) 3.5 - 4.5 mm (0.14 - 0.17 in.) Check that the engine oil you use comes
under the quality classification of SG, SH,
(For diesel engine model) SJ, SL, SM or SN. Select the appropriate
The drive belts tension is adjusted auto- oil viscosity according to the above chart.
matically.
SAE 0W-20 (1) is the best choice for good
fuel economy and good startability in cold
weather.

7-6

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE: Oil level check (For diesel engine models)


We recommend that you use MARUTI
genuine oil. To purchase it, visit an autho- (For petrol engine models) EXAMPLE
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop. EXAMPLE
(For diesel engine model)
EXAMPLE

(1)

5W-30, 5W-40

o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 66RM07001

80G064
EXAMPLE
Upper (3)
EXAMPLE Lower
79MH0760

(1) Recommended

Check that the engine oil you use comes


under the quality classification of ACEA (2) (1)
A5/B5. Select the appropriate oil viscosity
according to the above chart

SAE 5W-30 (1) is the best choice for good


fuel economy and good startability in cold
68PH00703
weather.
(1) MIN
52D084
NOTE: (2) MAX
We recommend that you use MARUTI (3) Engine oil dipstick
genuine oil. To purchase it, visit an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

7-7

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

It is important to keep the engine oil at the Refilling not to overfill the oil. Too much oil is almost
correct level for proper lubrication of your as bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
vehicles engine. Check the oil level with (For petrol engine models) engine and allow it to idle for about a min-
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level EXAMPLE ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle and check the oil level again.
is on a slope. The oil level should be
checked either before starting the engine Changing engine oil and filter
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the Open Close Drain the engine oil while the engine is still
engine. warm.
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-
ored with yellow for easy identification. EXAMPLE
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe the oil off with
a clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way
into the engine, and then remove it again. Open Close
The oil on the stick should be between the
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.
68PH00762
If the oil level indication is near the lower
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to (For diesel engine model)
the upper limit.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble 68PM00703
due to insufficient oil. Close
Open 1) Remove the oil filler cap.
2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.
3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug
NOTICE and drain the engine oil.
(For diesel engine models)
Do not top up the oil over the MAX CAUTION
limit. Too much oil causes serious
engine trouble. The engine oil temperature may be
82PM07001 high enough to burn your fingers
Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly when the drain plug is loosened. Wait
through the filler hole to bring the oil level until the drain plug is cool enough to
to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful touch with your bare hands.

7-8

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(For petrol engine models)


EXAMPLE WARNING EXAMPLE
(Continued)
To minimize your exposure to used
oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and
moisture-proof gloves (such as dish-
washing gloves) when changing oil. If
oil contacts your skin, wash thor-
oughly with soap and water.
Launder any clothing or rags if it is
with oil.
Recycle or properly dispose of used
oil and oil filters. (2)
(1)
68PH00705
4) Reinstall the drain plug with new gas- 68PH00706
Tightening torque for drain plug ket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to (1) Loosen
Petrol engine models: the specified torque. (2) Tighten
35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)
Tightening (viewed from filter top)
Diesel engine models: Oil filter replacement
20 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.8 lb-ft) 1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil- EXAMPLE
ter counterclockwise and remove it.
WARNING 2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount- (2)
ing surface on the engine where the
Engine oil can be hazardous. Chil- new filter will be seated.
dren and pets may be harmed by 3) Smear a small amount of engine oil
swallowing new or used oil. Keep around the rubber gasket of the new oil
new and used oil and used oil filters filter.
away from children and pets. 4) Screw the new filter by hand until the fil-
Repeated, prolonged contact with (1)
ter gasket contacts the mounting sur-
used engine oil may cause skin can- face.
cer.
Brief contact with used oil may irri- 54G093
tate skin.
(Continued) (1) Oil filter
(2) 3/4 turn

7-9

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE


To tighten the oil filter properly, it is To prevent oil leakage, check that the When replacing the oil filter, it is
important to accurately identify the oil filter is tight, but do not over- recommended that you use a MAR-
position at which the filter gasket tighten it. UTI genuine replacement filter. If
first contacts the mounting surface. you use an aftermarket filter, check
Refill with oil and oil leakage check that it is of equivalent quality and
(For diesel engine models) 1) Pour oil through the filler hole and follow the manufacturers instruc-
install the filler cap. tions.
EXAMPLE Oil leakage from the periphery of
For the approximate capacity of the oil,
(2) refer to Recommended fuel / lubricants the oil filter or drain plug indicate
and capacities (approx.) in SPECIFI- incorrect installation or gasket
CATIONS section. damage. If you find any leakage or
(1) are not sure that the filter has been
2) Start the engine and carefully check the
oil filter and the drain plug for leakage. properly tightened, have the vehi-
Run the engine at various speeds for at cle inspected by an authorised
least 5 minutes. Maruti Suzuki workshop.
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-
utes. Check the oil level again and add
84E016 oil if necessary. Check for leakage
(1) Loosen again.
(2) Tighten
5) Tighten the filter as specified below
from the point of contact with the
mounting surface (or to the specified
torque) using an oil filter wrench.
Tightening torque for oil filter
3/4 turn or
Petrol engine models:
14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)
Diesel engine models:
25 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18.5 lb-ft)

7-10

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Engine coolant Adding coolant


NOTICE
Selection of coolant To avoid damaging your cooling sys- WARNING
To maintain optimum performance and
tem: Swallowing engine coolant can cause
durability of your engine, use MARUTI
Always use a high quality ethylene severe injury or death. Inhaling cool-
genuine coolant or equivalent.
glycol base non-silicate type cool- ant mist or vapors or getting coolant
This type of coolant is the best for cooling ant diluted with distilled water at in your eyes could result in severe
system for the following reasons: the correct mixture concentration. injury.
The coolant helps maintain proper Make sure that the proper mix is 50/ Do not drink antifreeze or coolant
engine temperature. 50 coolant to distilled water (Die- solution. If swallowed, do not
It gives proper protection against freez- sel) and 30/70 (Petrol) and in no induce vomiting. Immediately con-
ing and boiling. case higher than 70/30. Concentra- tact a poison control center or a
It gives proper protection against corro- tions greater than 70/30 coolant to physician.
sion and rust. distilled water will cause overheat- Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot
Failure to use the proper coolant can dam- ing conditions. vapors. If inhaled, remove to a
age your cooling system. An authorised Do not use straight coolant nor fresh air area.
Maruti Suzuki workshop can help you plain water. If coolant gets in the eyes, flush
select the proper coolant. Do not add extra inhibitors or addi- with water and seek medical atten-
tives. They may not be compatible tion.
with your cooling system. Wash thoroughly after handling
Do not mix different types of base coolant.
coolants. Doing so may result in Keep engine coolant out of the
accelerated seal wear and/or the reach of children and pets.
possibility of severe overheating
and extensive engine damage.
NOTICE
Coolant level check The mixture you use should con-
Check the coolant level at the reservoir tain 50% concentration of anti-
tank, not at the radiator. With the engine freeze.
cool, the coolant level should be between If the lowest ambient temperature
FULL and LOW marks. in your area is expected to be 35C
(31F) or below, use higher con-
centrations up to 60% following the
instructions on the antifreeze con-
tainer.

7-11

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(For petrol engine models) (For diesel engine models) If the coolant level is below LOW mark,
more coolant should be added. When the
EXAMPLE engine is cool, remove the degassing tank
cap by turning it counterclockwise slowly to
release any pressure. And add coolant
until the degassing tank level reaches
FULL
FULL mark. Never fill the degassing tank
LOW
above FULL mark.

Coolant replacement
Since special procedures are required, ask
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
56RM07010 for this job.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
68PM00704

If the coolant level is below LOW mark, It is hazardous to remove the reser-
more coolant should be added. While the voir tank cap (degassing tank cap) for
engine cool, remove the reservoir tank cap a diesel engine when the water tem-
and add coolant until the reservoir tank perature is high, because scalding
level reaches FULL mark. Never fill the fluid and steam may be blown out
reservoir tank above FULL mark. under pressure. Wait until the coolant
temperature has lowered before
removing the cap.
NOTICE
When putting the cap on the reser-
voir tank, line up the mark on the cap
and the mark on the tank. Failure to
follow this can result in coolant leak-
age.

7-12

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Air cleaner (For diesel engine model) Spark plugs


If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there EXAMPLE
will be greater intake resistance, resulting Spark plug replacement and inspec-
in decreased power output and increased tion
fuel consumption. (For petrol engine model)
(For petrol engine model) EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(1)

56RH00713

1) Unclamp the side clamps or loosen the


screws, and remove the element from
the air cleaner case. If it appears to be (2) (3)
dirty, replace it with a new one. 56RH00709
2) Clamp the side clamps or tighten the
68PM00706
screws securely. To access the spark plug:
1) Disconnect the coupler (1) while push-
ing the release lever.
2) Remove the bolt (2).
3) Pull out the ignition coil (3) straight.

7-13

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE:
During installation, check that the wires, EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
Loosen
couplers, sealing rubber of air cleaner
chassis and washers, are correctly
returned in place.
Tighten
EXAMPLE a

Correct Wrong

60G160 54G106

Spark plug gap a:


NOTICE LKR6F-10
When installing the spark plugs, 0.95 1.05 mm (0.037 0.041 in.)
78K179 screw them in with your fingers to
avoid stripping the threads. NOTICE
Tighten the spark plugs with a
NOTICE torque wrench to 18 Nm (1.8 kg-m, When replacing spark plugs, you
should use the brand and type speci-
When pulling out the ignition coils, 13.0 lb-ft). Do not allow contami-
fied for your vehicle. For the specified
do not pull on the cable. Pulling on nants to enter the engine through
plugs, refer to SPECIFICATIONS
the cable can damage it. the spark plug holes when the
section in the end of this book. If you
When servicing the iridium/plati- plugs are removed.
wish to use a brand of spark plug
num spark plugs (slender center Never use spark plugs with the
other than the specified plugs, con-
electrode type plugs), do not touch wrong thread size.
the center electrode, as it is easy to sult an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
be damaged.

7-14

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Gear oil Gear oil level check To check the gear oil level, use the fol-
lowing procedure:
(For petrol engine models)
Manual transmission oil / Auto Gear 1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with
Shift oil EXAMPLE the parking brake applied. Then, stop
When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the (1) the engine.
appropriate viscosity and grade as shown 2) Remove the oil filler and level plug.
in the chart below. 3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the
oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If
We highly recommend you use MARUTI gear oil does not flow from the plug
GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W for manual hole, add oil through the filler plug hole
transmission oil. until oil flows a little from the plug hole.

Manual transmission oil / Auto Gear Tightening torque for oil filler and
Shift oil level plug
68KH073
Manual transmission (1) or (3)
(1) Oil filler and level plug
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)
75W (For diesel engine models) Auto Gear Shift (1) or (2)
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)
o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 EXAMPLE
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
CAUTION
(2)
56RM07006
After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
temperature may be high enough to
burn you. Wait until the oil filler and
level plug are cool enough to touch
with your bare hands before inspect-
ing gear oil level.

(3) NOTICE
66RH125 When tightening the plug, apply the
(2) Oil filler and level plug following sealing compound or
(for Auto Gear Shift) equivalent to the plug threads to pre-
(3) Oil filler and level plug vent oil leakage.
(for manual transmission) MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. 1217G

7-15

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Gear oil change Clutch pedal Fluid control clutch (if equipped)
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required, ask an authorised Cable control clutch (if equipped) EXAMPLE
Maruti Suzuki workshop for this job.
EXAMPLE

MAX

MIN

d
68PM00707

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-


54G274
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.
Clutch pedal play d: If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully
10 - 15 mm (0.4 - 0.6 in.) depressed, have the clutch inspected by
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. If
Measure the clutch pedal play by moving the clutch fluid level is near MIN line, fill it
the clutch pedal with your hand and mea- up to MAX line with Maruti Genuine
suring the distance it moves until you feel Brake Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3.
slight resistance. The play in the clutch We highly recommend to use Maruti Gen-
pedal should be between the specified val- uine Brake Fluid (MGBF).
ues. If the play is more or less than the
above, or clutch dragging is felt with the
pedal fully depressed, have the clutch
inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.

7-16

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuel Filter Brakes


WARNING
(for diesel engine model) Brake fluid Failure to follow the guidelines below
If the fuel filter warning light comes on
can result in personal injury or seri-
when driving, there is a possibility that EXAMPLE ous damage to the brake system.
water is in the fuel filter. Drain water as
If the brake fluid in the reservoir
soon as possible. Have your vehicle
drops below a certain level, the
inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
brake warning light on the instru-
workshop.
ment cluster will come on (the
MAX engine must be running with the
parking brake fully disengaged).
Should the light come on, immedi-
ately ask an authorised Maruti
MIN Suzuki workshop to inspect the
brake system.
A rapid fluid loss indicates leakage
68PM00707
in the brake system which should
be inspected by an authorised
Check the brake fluid level by looking at Maruti Suzuki workshop immedi-
the reservoir in the engine compartment. ately.
Check that the fluid level is between MAX Do not use any fluid other than
and MIN lines with Maruti Genuine Brake Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF)
Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3. or DOT 3. Do not use reclaimed
We highly recommend to use Maruti Gen- fluid or fluid that has been stored in
uine Brake Fluid (MGBF). old or open containers. It is essen-
tial that foreign particles and other
NOTICE liquids are kept out of the brake
If your brake fluid level is near the fluid reservoir.
MIN line, there is a possibility of
brake pad and/or shoe wear and CAUTION
brake fluid leakage. Consult with
your authorised Maruti Suzuki work- Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
shop regarding this possibility before damage painted surfaces. Be careful
filling the reservoir. when refilling the reservoir.

7-17

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING EXAMPLE EXAMPLE


Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-
lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-
tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,
do not induce vomiting. Immediately
contact a poison control center or a
physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,
flush eyes with water and seek medi-
cal attention. Wash thoroughly after a
handling. Solution can be poisonous
to animals. Keep out of reach of chil-
dren and animals. 54G108
60G104A
NOTE: Minimum distance between brake pedal
The fluid level can be expected to gradu- and floor carpet a: 53 mm (2.1 in.)
ally fall as the brake pads and/or shoe WARNING
wear. With the engine running, measure the dis-
tance between the brake pedal and floor If you experience any of the following
Brake fluid absorbs water over time and problems with your vehicles brake
brake fluid with high water content may carpet when the pedal is depressed with
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The system, have the vehicle inspected
cause vapor lock or brake system mal- immediately by an authorised Maruti
function. Replace your brake fluid in minimum distance required is as specified.
Since your vehicles brake system is self- Suzuki workshop.
accordance with the maintenance Poor braking performance
schedule in your Owner's Manual. adjusting, there is no need for pedal
adjustment. Uneven braking (brakes not work-
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as ing uniformly on all wheels.)
Brake pedal measured above is less than the minimum Excessive pedal travel
Check brake pedal stroke. If the stroke is Brake dragging
distance required, have your vehicle
so large, have the brake system inspected Excessive noise
inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
workshop.
If you doubt the brake pedal is at its normal
height, check it as follows:
NOTE:
When measuring the distance between the
brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to
include the floor mat or rubber on the floor
wall in your measurement.

7-18

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Parking brake Steering Tires


EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1)

c
c

EXAMPLE
68PM7001
52RM70030 56RH00705
Ratchet tooth specification b: Steering wheel play c: The front and rear tire pressure specifica-
4th 9th 0 30 mm (0.0 1.2 in.) tions are listed in the tire information label.
Lever pull force (1): Both front and rear tires should have the
200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs) Check the play of the steering wheel by specified tire pressure.
gently turning it from left to right and right
Check the parking brake for proper adjust-
ment by counting the number of clicks
to left, with wheels in straight ahead posi- Tire inspection
tion and engine in OFF condition. Measure Inspect your vehicles tires at least once a
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly the distance that the steering moves month or before long trip by performing the
pull up on the parking brake lever to the before you feel slight resistance. The play following checks:
point of full engagement. The parking should be between the specified values.
brake lever should stop between the speci- 1) Measure the air pressure with a tire
fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels Check that the steering wheel turns easily gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-
should be securely locked. If the parking and smoothly without rattling by turning it sary. Remember to check the spare
brake is not properly adjusted or the all the way to the right and to the left while tire, too.
brakes drag is suspected after the lever driving very slowly in an open area. If the
has been fully released, have the parking amount of free play is not as specified or
brake inspected and/or adjusted by an you find anything else to be wrong, an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. inspection must be performed by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

7-19

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING EXAMPLE CAUTION


Air pressures should be checked Hitting curbs and running over rocks
(1)
when the tires are cold or you may can damage tires and affect wheel
get inaccurate readings. alignment. Have tires and wheel
Check the inflation pressure from alignment checked periodically by an
time to time while inflating the tire authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
gradually, until the specified pres-
sure is obtained. 4) Check for loose wheel nuts.
Never under-inflate or over-inflate (2) 5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
the tires. other objects sticking into the tires.
Under-inflation can cause unusual
52KM110
handling characteristics or can
cause the rim to slip on the tire (1) Tread wear indicator
bead, resulting in an accident or (2) Indicator location mark
damage to the tire or rim.
Over-inflation can cause the tire to 2) Check that the depth of the tread
burst, resulting in personal injury. groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).
Over-inflation can also cause To help you check this, the tires have
unusual handling characteristics molded-in tread wear indicators in the
which may result in an accident. grooves. When the indicators appear
on the tread surface, the remaining
depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
or less and the tire should be replaced.
3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and
damage. Any tires with cracks or other
damage should be replaced. If any tires
show abnormal wear, have them
inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

7-20

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

5-tire rotation
WARNING NOTICE (Vehicle with 165/80R14 85T tire)
Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is Replacing the original tires with tires EXAMPLE
equipped with tires which are all of a different size may result in false
the same type and size (Except speedometer or odometer readings.
spare tire. Which may be depen- Check with an authorised Maruti
dent on vehicle variant). This is Suzuki workshop before purchasing
important to ensure proper steering replacement tires that differ in size
and handling of the vehicle. Never from the original tires.
mix tires of different size or type on
the four wheels of your vehicle. The Tire rotation
size and type of tires used should
be only those approved by MARUTI 4-tire rotation
SUZUKI as standard or optional (Vehicle with 185/65R15 88T tire) 68PH00755
equipment for your vehicle.
Replacing the wheels and tires EXAMPLE To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to
equipped on your vehicle with cer- prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-
tain combinations of after market trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
wheels and tires can significantly km. After rotation, adjust front and rear tire
change the steering and handling pressures to the specification listed in your
characteristics of your vehicle. vehicles tire information label.
Therefore, use only those wheel
and tire combinations approved by Wheel Balancing
MARUTI SUZUKI as standard or If the vehicle vibrates abnormally on
optional equipment for your vehi- smooth road, have the wheel balanced at
cle. Maruti Suzuki Authorized Workshop.

Wheel Alignment
54G114 In case of abnormal tire wear or pulling
towards one side, have the wheel aligned
at Maruti Suzuki Authorized Workshop.

Tubeless Tires
The vehicle is equipped with Tubeless
Tires. In tubeless tire, a thin layer of butyl
rubber is used for lining the inside of the

7-21

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

tubeless tire. This layer is to prevent air 8) In case of any problem, please get in
loss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. The touch with authorised Maruti Suzuki WARNING
air pressure is maintained by the sealing workshop.
between tire bead and wheel rim. Tubeless The temporary spare tire and wheel
are intended for temporary emergency
tires are having advantage of slow air loss Temporary spare tire (if equipped) use only. Continuous use of this spare
and preventing sudden deflation while driv- Your vehicle comes equipped with the tem-
ing. can result in tire failure and loss of
porary spare tire. It is only intended for
control. Always observe these precau-
temporary emergency use, until the con-
Care and maintenance tips for tubeless tions when using this spare:
ventional tire can be repaired or replaced.
tires The inflation pressure of the temporary Your vehicle will handle differently
1) Always maintain recommended infla- spare tire should be checked at least with this temporary spare.
tion pressure. Driving continuously at monthly. At the same time, check that the Do not exceed 80 km/h speed (only
low inflation pressure can lead to tire tire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten it. vehicle with 185/65R15 88T, 185/
damage. 65R15 88H tire).
2) In case any leakage is found, check for Replace this spare with a standard
Note that two or more temporary spare
any nail penetration/valve core damage tire and wheel as soon as possible.
tires should not be used on one vehicle
or rim bent. Damaged wheel must not Use of this spare may reduce
simultaneously.
be used. ground clearance.
3) In case tire has run at low pressure, it Set the specified tire pressure indi-
must be inspected for any defect. cated on the tire information label
4) Whenever new tire is fitted, replace the located on the drivers door lock
valve. pillar.
5) If continuous high speed driving is Do not use tire chains on the tem-
required, increase tires pressure by 5 porary spare. If you must use tire
psi over recommended inflation pres- chains, rearrange the wheels so
sure. standard tires and wheels are fitted
6) Never run the tire beyond TWI (Tread to the front axle.
wear indicator). The tire is recom- The temporary spare tire has a
mended to be replaced when the much shorter tread life than the
remaining tread has worn to this point. conventional tires on your vehicle.
The indicators are spaced across the Replace the tire as soon as the
tread around the tire marked by a trian- tread wear indicator appears.
gular symbol (TWI). When replacing the temporary
7) Always prefer tubeless tire mounting spare tire, use a replacement tire
machine. In case of manual mounting- with the exact same size and con-
tire/wheel rim damage may occur. struction.

7-22

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Battery Replacement of the battery


EXAMPLE
(For petrol engine model)
WARNING (3) (1)
EXAMPLE
Batteries produce flammable
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and (2)
sparks away from the battery or an (1)
explosion may occur. Never smoke
when working near the battery.
When checking or servicing the (2)
battery, disconnect the negative (4)
cable. Be careful not to cause a
short circuit by allowing metal
objects to contact the battery posts
and the vehicle at the same time. 56RM07007
To avoid harm to yourself or dam- For maintenance-free battery (cap-less
age to your vehicle or battery, fol- type), you need not add water. For tradi- 68PM00711
low the jump-starting instructions tional type battery, which has water filler (For diesel engine model)
in EMERGENCY SERVICE sec- caps, the level of the battery solution must
tion if it is necessary to jump-start EXAMPLE (1)
be kept between the upper level (1) and (4)
your vehicle. the lower level lines (2) at all times. If the
Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from level is found to be below the lower level (2)
battery can cause blindness or line (2), add distilled water to the upper
severe burns. Use proper eye pro- level line (1). You should periodically check
tection and gloves. Flush eyes or the battery, battery terminals, and battery
body with ample water and get hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove
medical care immediately if suf- corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia
fered. Keep batteries out of reach mixed with water, or baking soda mixed
of children. with water. After removing corrosion, rinse
with clean water. (3)
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
a month or longer, disconnect the cable 56RH00721
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.

7-23

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

To remove the battery: Fuses


1) Disconnect the negative cable (1). WARNING Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as
2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).
Batteries contain toxic substances described below:
For petrol engine model; including sulfuric acid and lead. They Main fuse
3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and could have potential negative conse- The main fuse takes current directly from
remove the retainer (4). quences for the environment and the lead-acid battery.
For diesel engine model; human health. Used batteries must
be disposed of or recycled according Primary fuses
3) Remove the bracket bolt (3) and
to applicable rules or regulations and These fuses are between the main fuse
remove the bracket (4). and individual fuses, and are for electrical
4) Remove the battery. must not be disposed of with ordi-
nary household trash. Make sure not load groups.
To install the battery: to tip over the battery when you Individual fuses
1) Install the battery in the reverse order of remove it from the vehicle. Other- These fuses are for individual electrical cir-
removal. wise, sulfuric acid could run out and cuits.
2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery you might get injury.
cables securely. To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-
vided in the fuse box cover.
NOTE: NOTICE
When the battery is disconnected, some After stopping the engine, controller EXAMPLE
of the vehicles functions will be initial- and system are operated for a while.
ized and/or deactivated. Therefore, before removing the bat-
These functions must be required to tery, wait for more than one minute
reset after the battery is reconnected. after turning the ignition switch to
Do not disconnect the battery terminals OFF or changing the ignition mode
for at least one minute after the ignition to LOCK (OFF).
switch is turned off, or the engine switch (1)
is pressed to change the ignition mode
to LOCK (OFF).

56RM07005

7-24

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses in engine compartment Relay box


MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE
EXAMPLE (1) 120 A FL1

(10)

(11)
(7)

(8)

(9)
(2)
(1) (2) 100 A FL2

(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(3) 80 A FL3
(4) 100 A FL4

(20)

(21)

(22)

(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)

(27)

(28)
(29)
(30)
(5) 50 A FL5
(31) (32) (33) (34)
(6) 150 A FL6*2
(35) (7) 30 A Starting motor
(3) (36)
(37)
(8) 30 A Blower fan
56RM07001
(9) 40 A Battery
(1) Main fuse box
(2) Relay box 56RM07008
(10) 40 A ABS motor
(3) Sub relay box
Sub relay box (11) 40 A Ignition switch
Main fuse box (12) 30 A B/U
(13) Blank
(5) (5) (14) Blank
(6) (38)
(4) (4) (39) (15) Blank
(40)
(3) (1) (3) (41) (16) 25 A ABS control module
(1)
(2) (2) (17) 15 A Headlight (Left)
(18) 15 A Headlight (Right)
74LHT0715 (19) Blank
56RH00715 (20) 40 A T/M PUMP

7-25

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(21) 30 A Radiator fan *1: Petrol engine models


*2: Diesel engine models WARNING
(22) 60 A Power steering *3: Models with LED headlights
If the main fuse or a primary fuse
(23) 5A ECM The main fuse, primary fuses and some of blows, have your vehicle inspected
the individual fuses are located in the by an authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
(24) 20 A Fuel pump shop. Always use a MARUTI genuine
engine compartment. If the main fuse
(25) 20 A Front fog light blows, no electrical component will func- replacement. Never use a substitute
tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical such as a wire even for a temporary
(26) 10 A Air compressor component in the corresponding load repair, or extensive electrical damage
group will function. When replacing the and a fire can result.
(27) 50 A Ignition switch 2
main fuse, a primary fuse or an individual
(28) 15 A Transmission fuse, use a MARUTI genuine replacement. NOTE:
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro- Check that the fuse box always carries
15 A FI*1 vided in the fuse box cover. The amperage spare fuses.
(29)
30 A FI main*2 of each fuse is shown in the back of the
fuse box cover.
(30) 15 A Transmission2 (AGS)
(31) Blank EXAMPLE
(32) Blank
(33) 5A Starting Signal OK

(34) Blank
(35) 20 A INJ DRV*2
(36) Blank
BLOWN
(37) 10 A FI*2
(38) Blank
68PH00723
(39) 25 A Headlight HI *3
(40) 15 A Headlight HI (Right)*3
(41) 15 A Headlight HI (Left)*3

7-26

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses under dashboard (21) 20 A Power window timer


PRIMARY FUSE
EXAMPLE (22) 5A Key
(1) 30 A Power window
(23) 15 A Horn
(2) 10 A Meter
(24) 5A Tail light (Left)
(3) 15A Ignition coil
(25) 10 A Tail light
(4) 5A Ignition-1 signal 2
(26) 10 A Air bag
(5) 20 A Shift lever
(27) 10 A Ignition-1 signal
(6) 20A S/R
(28) 10 A Buck up light
(7) Blank
(29) 5A ACC-3
(8) 20 A Door
56RH00706 (30) 20 A Rear defogger
(9) 15 A Steering lock
Type A (31) 10 A Heated mirror
(10) 10 A Hazard
(32) 15 A ACC-2
(11) 5A A-STOP controller
(33) 5A ACC
(12) 10A RR fog lamp
(34) 10 A Wiper
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) 5A ABS control module
(35) 5A Ignition-2 signal
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (14) 15A Seat heater
(36) 15 A Washer
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) (15) 5A Ignition-1 signal 3
(37) 25 A Front wiper
(39) (40) (16) 10 A Dome light-2
(38) 10 A Stop light
(17) 5A Dome light
(39) Blank
56RM07002
(18) 15 A Radio
(40) 25 A Rear defogger
(19) 5A CONT
(20) 5A Key 2

7-27

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Type B (12) 15 A ACC-2


WARNING
(13) 5A ACC Always replace a blown fuse with a
(14) 5A Starting signal fuse of the correct amperage. Never
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) use a substitute such as aluminum
(15) 10 A Ignition signal foil or wire to replace a blown fuse. If
(16) 10 A Air bag you replace a fuse and the new one
(11) (12) (13) blows in a short period of time, you
(17) 5A ABS control module may have a major electrical problem.
Have your vehicle inspected immedi-
(14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (18) 15 A Horn ately by your authorised Maruti
(19) 20 A Door lock Suzuki workshop.

(20) - Blank
56RM07009
(21) 15 A Radio
PRIMARY FUSE
(22) 5A Dome light
(1) 10 A Back-up light
(23) 10 A Dome light-2
(2) 15 A Ignition
(3) 10 A Meter EXAMPLE
(4) - Blank
(5) 5A Ignition-2 signal
(6) 15 A Washer
(7) 25 A Front wiper
(8) 10 A Tail light
OK BLOWN
(9) 10 A Hazard
(10) 10 A Stop light
(11) - Blank 81A283

7-28

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Headlight aiming Bulb replacement Headlights


Since special procedures are required, ask Vehicle with the LED headlights
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for CAUTION Since special procedures are required, we
this job. recommend you take your vehicle to an
Light bulbs can be hot enough to
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
burn your finger right after turning
bulb replacement.
off lights. This is true especially for
halogen headlight bulbs. Replace
the bulbs after they become cool WARNING
enough. Never attempt to replace the bulb of a
The headlight bulbs are filled with discharge headlight, or you could
pressurized halogen gas. They can suffer an electric shock from the
burst and injure you if they are hit high-voltage circuit in the headlight
or dropped. Handle them carefully. system. Always have a discharge
To avoid injury by sharp-edged headlight bulb replaced by an autho-
parts of the body, wear gloves and rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
a long-sleeved shirt when replacing
light bulbs. Vehicle with the halogen headlights
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
(1)
The oils from your skin may cause a
halogen bulb to overheat and burst
when the lights are on. Grasp a new
bulb with a clean cloth.

NOTICE
Frequent bulb replacement indicates
the need for an inspection of the elec-
trical system. This should be carried
out by your authorised Maruti Suzuki 52RM70220
workshop.
(1) Headlight (high/low beam)

7-29

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE: Side turn signal light (on fender)


EXAMPLE Ensure that coupler (2) is not twisted (if equipped)
(3) during installation.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)

68PM00736

52RM70230 1) Remove the light housing (1) by sliding


to left with your finger.
NOTE:
You can see the position of retaining spring EXAMPLE
from the hole of headlight.

(2)

(4)

56RH00710

Open the engine food. Disconnect the cou-


pler (2). Remove the sealing rubber (3).
Push the retaining spring (4) forward and
unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a 68PM00717
new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise and
pull it out from the light housing.

7-30

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Front turn signal light and


EXAMPLE front position light EXAMPLE
Vehicle with the halogen headlights
EXAMPLE

(3)
(1)

(4)
(5)
(2) 68PH00732

1) Open the engine hood. To remove the


68PM00718
bulb holder of the front turn signal light
(4) Removal 52RM70240 or the front position light from the light
(5) Install (1) Front turn signal light housing, turn the holder counterclock-
(2) Front position light wise and pull it out.
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
side turn signal light (3), simply pull out
or push in the bulb. Vehicle with the LED headlights EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(1)
(2)

(3)
(4) (1)
68PM00721

(3) Removal
52RM70140 (4) Installation
(1) Front turn signal light

7-31

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig- Rear combination light
nal light (1) from the bulb holder, push
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise. EXAMPLE
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn (2)
it clockwise. (1)
To remove and install the bulb of the
front position light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
Front fog light (if equipped)
1) Start the engine. Turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of the fog
light to be replaced to replace the bulb
easily. Then turn off the engine. EXAMPLE
52RM70250
EXAMPLE 56RH00712
3) Open the end of the cover inside the
fender. 1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the light
housing (2) straight.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(4)

(2)

56RH00716 (3)
2) Remove the clips (1) and screws (2) at (4)
the bottom of bumper. (3)
For removing the clip, use a flat blade 52R70140
screwdriver as show in the illustration. 4) Disconnect the coupler (3) by pushing 56RH00717

the lock release. Turn the bulb holder 2) To remove the bulb holder of the rear
(4) counterclockwise and remove it. turn signal light (3) or the reversing light

7-32

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(4) from the light housing, turn the License plate light Interior light
holder counterclockwise and pull it out. Remove the lens by using a flat-bladed
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as
EXAMPLE shown. To install it, simply push it back in.
Front

(1)
(3) / (4)

(5)
(6)
EXAMPLE
56RH00719
56RH00718
1) Open the trunk lid. Turn the bulb holder
(5) Removal of the license light (1) counterclockwise EXAMPLE
(6) Installation and remove it. 76MH0A139

3) To remove and install the bulb of the Center


rear turn signal light (3) or the reversing EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
light (4), simply pull out or push in the
bulb. (2)

(3)

(4)
56RH00720

(3) Removal
(4) Installation
2) To remove and install the bulb of the
license light (2), simply pull out or push 56RM07011
in the bulb.

7-33

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Trunk lid light (if equipped) Wiper blades NOTE:


Some wiper blades may be different from
EXAMPLE the ones described here depending on
EXAMPLE vehicle specifications. If so, consult your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
proper replacement method.

For windshield wipers:


EXAMPLE

56RH00722
54G129
1) Open the trunk lid and remove the lens
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-
by turning it counterclockwise.
aged, or make streaks when wiping,
2) To remove and install the bulb of trunk
replace the wiper blades.
lid, simply pull out or push in the bulb.
To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-
After replacement of bulb, perform the cedures below. 70G119
operation 1) in reverse order to restore
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-
to original state. NOTICE dow.
To avoid scratching or breaking the
window, do not let the wiper arm NOTE:
strike the window while replacing the When raising both of the front wiper arms,
wiper blade. pull the drivers side wiper arm up first.
When returning the wiper arms, lower the
passengers side wiper arm first.
Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere
with each other.

7-34

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Removal
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(3)

(2)

(1)
(3)
79MH0756
68PH00751

Installation (3) Retainer

EXAMPLE 4) If the new blade is provided without the


(2) (3) two metal retainers (3), move them
from the old blade to the new one.

EXAMPLE

(1) (3)
(3)
68PH00750

2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)


and remove the wiper frame from the
68PH00752 (3)
arm as shown.
3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade (1) Locked end
and slide the blade out as shown.
79MH0757

7-35

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Windshield washer fluid Air conditioning system


EXAMPLE If you do not use the air conditioner for a
EXAMPLE long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
(A) conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
(B) idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
(3) and helps protect the internal components.

Air conditioner filter replacement


60MH072
(if equipped)
(A) Up 56RM07004
(B) Down Check that there is washer fluid in the tank.
Refill it if necessary. Use a good quality
NOTE: windshield washer fluid, diluted with water
When you install the metal retainers (3), as necessary.
check that the direction of metal retainers
is as shown in the above illustrations.
WARNING
5) Install the new blade in the reverse Do not use radiator antifreeze in the
order of removal, with the locked end windshield washer reservoir. This
positioned toward the wiper arm. can severely impair visibility when
Check that the blade is properly sprayed on the windshield, and also
retained by all the hooks. Lock the can damage your vehicles paint. EXAMPLE
blade end into place. 56RH00707
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, checking
that the lock lever is snapped securely NOTICE 1) To approach the air conditioner filter,
into the arm. remove the glove box. Press inward on
Damage may result if the washer both sides of the glove box, pull it front-
motor is operated with no fluid in the ward and remove it.
washer tank.

7-36

56RH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(3)

(2) (1)

EXAMPLE
56RM07003

2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out the


air conditioner filter (2).
Install a new filter in reverse order of
removal.

NOTE:
When you install a new filter, check that
the UP mark (3) faces upward.

7-37

56RH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire changing tool ............................................................... 8-1
Jacking instructions ........................................................... 8-3
Jump-starting instructions ................................................. 8-6
Towing .................................................................................. 8-7
Engine trouble: Starter does not operate ......................... 8-8
Engine trouble: Flooded engine ........................................ 8-9
Engine trouble: Overheating .............................................. 8-9
Warning triangle .................................................................. 8-10

60G411

56RH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

Tire changing tool The tire changing tools are stowed in the
luggage compartment, below the luggage
compartment board (5).
EXAMPLE Pull the thread of the luggage compart-
ment board upwards. The luggage com-
partment board can be held open by
hanging the thread on the hook as shown
in the above illustration.
(5)
EXAMPLE
(3)

(1)

(2) 56RH00805

To remove the jack (1), turn its shaft coun-


(1) (3) terclockwise by using jack handle (3) and
pull the jack out of the storage bracket.
(4)

56RM08001

(1) Jack
(2) Wheel wrench
(3) Jack handle
(4) Towing hook
(5) Luggage compartment board

8-1

56RH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

EXAMPLE NOTICE EXAMPLE


To avoid damaging the storage
(1) (4) bracket, do not expand the jack
excessively.

WARNING
After using the tire changing tools,